JP2022128505A5 - - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a win state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning hole is a win .

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-000392

However, there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous and the player quickly becomes bored with the game.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game.

In order to achieve this object, the game machine according to claim 1 is provided with first discrimination means capable of executing the first discrimination, and the first discrimination result by the first discrimination means is a specific first discrimination result. A first effect execution means capable of executing a first effect that ends when a predetermined period elapses based on a certain thing, and a second determination capable of executing a second determination. means, and second effect execution means capable of executing a second effect based on the fact that the second determination result by the second determination means is a specific second determination result; The machine is configured to be set to a first state in which the second determination can be performed by the second determining means during the period in which the first effect is performed, and the first effect is started. A second state is set in which the second determination by the second determining means is not performed when the first effect is terminated after the predetermined period has elapsed .

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, the first determination means capable of executing the first determination, and the first determination result by the first determination means is a specific first determination result. , a first effect executing means capable of executing a first effect that ends when a predetermined period of time elapses; a second determining means capable of executing a second determination; a second effect execution means capable of executing a second effect based on the fact that the second determination result by the second determination means is a specific second determination result; A first state in which the second determination can be performed by the second determination means is set during a period in which one effect is executed, and the predetermined state is set after the first effect is started. A second state is set in which the second determination by the second determination means is not executed when the first effect is terminated due to the lapse of the period .

Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved .

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen of the third symbol display device in the first embodiment; (b) is the third symbol in the first embodiment; It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display mode displayed with a display apparatus. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display content when there is only a special figure 1 reserved ball at the end of the big hit displayed on the third symbol display device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents. It is the figure which showed an example of the display content at the time of dash mode displayed with the 3rd pattern display apparatus in 1 Embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed by the third symbol display device according to the first embodiment when the dash mode is finished, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents of the third symbol display device according to the first embodiment. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the effect when the latent certainty state is set after the end of the jackpot displayed in , and (c) is the third symbol display displayed by the third symbol display device in the first embodiment It is a timing chart showing the flow of production when the latent definite state after the end of the jackpot displayed on the device is set and the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is 1 to 4. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the game flow of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment; It is a figure showing typically composition of various counters in a 1st embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM of the main controller in the first embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a first winning random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first embodiment, (b) is the main controller in the first embodiment is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small per random number table set in the ROM of, (c) shows the contents of the second per random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment It is a schematic diagram shown typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the jackpot classification selection table set to ROM of the main-control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the jackpot classification selection table for normal use set to ROM of the main-control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probability variable jackpot type selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first embodiment, (b) is the main control in the first embodiment It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a small hit type selection table set in the ROM of the device. It is a schematic diagram showing a configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first embodiment. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a normal table set in a ROM of the main controller in the first embodiment; (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a probability variation table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first embodiment, (b) is the ROM of the main controller in the first embodiment FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a latency table set to . It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the normal figure fluctuation pattern table set to ROM of the main controller in 1st Embodiment. 3 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of the main controller in the first embodiment; FIG. 1A is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM of the audio ramp control device according to the first embodiment; FIG. 1B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device according to the first embodiment; FIG. be. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device according to a first embodiment; FIG. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining a power-on image. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the rear surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the rear surfaces BD. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the rear surface E. FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table; FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table; FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list; 4 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flow chart showing a first special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart showing a first special symbol jackpot determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart showing a first special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart showing a process during execution of the first special symbol variation executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation stop processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart showing the special figure 2 temporary stop processing that is executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol jackpot determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows special figure 2 deviation fluctuation processing which is executed by MPU in main control unit. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation in-execution process that is executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation stop process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 2 deviating stop processing that is executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 1 cancellation process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flow chart which shows the start prize-winning processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. 4 is a flow chart showing a first prefetching process executed by an MPU in a main controller; It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd look-ahead process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing that is executed by the MPU in the main controller. 4 is a flow chart showing through gate passage processing executed by an MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing start-up processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; It is a flowchart which shows a big-hit control process performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flow chart which shows big hit operation setting processing performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flow chart showing a jackpot ending process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows small hit control processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. Fig. 10 is a flow chart showing a start-up process performed by the MPU in the audio ramp controller; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in an audio lamp control device; It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing which is executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing which is executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device. 4 is a flowchart showing stop type command reception processing executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the number of pending pitches processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device; FIG. FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing a status command receiving process performed by an MPU in the audio lamp controller; FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing fluctuation stopping processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing confirmation related processing performed by the MPU in the audio ramp controller; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing temporary stop-related processing executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device; Fig. 10 is a flow chart showing a restart process performed by the MPU in the audio ramp controller; Fig. 10 is a flow chart showing the hit-related processing performed by the MPU in the audio ramp controller; It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot-related processing performed by MPU in an audio|voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the small hitting related processing which is executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device. 4 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing boot processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a flow chart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. 4 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, (b) is a flowchart showing a stop type command process executed by the MPU in the display control device be. (a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. . 4 is a flowchart showing ending command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a flowchart showing fluctuation stop command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing notification command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. . (a) is a flow chart showing rear image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; be. 4 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by an MPU in the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; 4 is a flow chart showing pointer update processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; (a) is a flow chart showing a transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing a resident image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device; be. 10 is a flowchart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing drawing processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the production|presentation displayed with the 3rd pattern display apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents of the ending screen of the jackpot game displayed by the third symbol display device in the second embodiment, (b) is the third symbol display in the second embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the content of the display screen in the probability change state displayed with a device. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display content after the start of variation per special figure 1 (non-variable special figure 2) displayed on the third symbol display device in the second embodiment, and (b) is It is the figure which showed an example of the display content in the case of special figure 2 small per during RUSH displayed with the 3rd design display device in 2nd Embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display content after the start of variation per special figure 1 (during special figure 2 variation) displayed on the third symbol display device in the second embodiment, and (b) is, It is a diagram showing an example of the display content when the special figure 2 variation is stopped during the variation per special figure 1 displayed on the third symbol display device in the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a special selection 2 table for the probability variable potential probability jackpot set in the ROM of the main controller in the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a probability variation table set in the ROM of the main controller in the second embodiment. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the game flow of the pachinko machine in the second embodiment; It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation start process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the game state update processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation stop process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end process 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in 2nd Embodiment. 10 is a flow chart showing fluctuation stop processing 2 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the second embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the third embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the third embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small winning random number 3 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the third embodiment, (b) is the main controller in the third embodiment FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a second winning random number 3 table set in a ROM of . (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection 3 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the third embodiment, (b) is the main control in the third embodiment It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the normal figure fluctuation pattern 3 table set to ROM of the apparatus. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a migration destination selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the third embodiment; FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing contents of a migration destination selection table set in a ROM of a main controller in the third embodiment; FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a transition 1 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the third embodiment; FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a transition 2 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the third embodiment; It is a schematic diagram showing typically the contents of a special table set in the ROM of the main controller in the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination process 3 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the special figure 2 deviation fluctuation processing 3 which is executed by the MPU in the main controller in the third embodiment.

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. 1 to 88. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having ball entrances 63, 64b1, 64b2, 640 and the like into which a large number of nails and balls can enter is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. Balls (game balls) flow down in front of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. In addition, the inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that shoots a ball to the front area (game area) of the game board 13 and a ball shooting unit 112a that shoots the ball to the front area of the game board 13. A launch rail (not shown) or the like is attached to guide the vehicle to the target. Details of the many ball entrances provided on the game board 13 will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

The front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls projected to the front side and formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface, and the upper tray 17 discharges prize balls, rental balls, and the like. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 9). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is changed, or the content of the super ready-to-win effect is changed. be.

The front frame 14 is provided with light-emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, an indicator lamp 34 is provided in the upper left part of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1).

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more splendor, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29-33.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to hit the ball in front of the game board 13. As shown in FIG.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, a shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is hit in front of the game board 13 with a flying distance corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape as seen from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, windmills, rails 61 and 62, and a general input. Sphere mouth 63, upper first ball entrance 64b1, lower first ball entrance 64b2, second ball entrance 640, left variable winning device 65, right variable winning device 650, normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, variable It is constructed by assembling the display device unit 80 and the like, and its peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the rear side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general ball entrance 63, the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, the left variable winning device 65, the right variable winning device 650, and the variable display device unit 80 are formed through the base plate 60 by router processing. It is arranged in a hole and fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with a tapping screw or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

In front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially circular arc is planted, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and a shot is fired). area where the ball flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the balls shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.

A first pattern display device 37 is provided on the upper left side of the return rubber 69 . The first pattern display device 37 is arranged so as to be covered with the back surface of the game board 13 (the surface opposite to the surface forming the game area) made of a transparent resin (for example, ABS). It is configured so that the shot ball does not collide with the first pattern display device 37 .

The first pattern display device 37 is provided with first pattern display devices 37a and 37b having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display. The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b display whether the ball has entered (won) the upper first ball entrance 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance 64b2, or the second ball entrance 640. It is configured so that it can be used properly according to whether the ball has entered the ball (winning a prize). Specifically, when the ball enters (wins) the upper first ball entrance 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance 64b2, the first symbol display device 37a operates. However, when the ball enters (wins) the second ball entrance 640, the first symbol display device 37b is activated. That is, the first symbol display device 37a shows the lottery result of the lottery (special figure 1 lottery) executed when the ball enters the upper first ball entrance 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance 64b2. The first symbol display device 37b is a display means for showing the lottery result of the lottery (special figure 2 lottery) executed when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640. .

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b use LEDs to indicate which of the game states of the pachinko machine 10 (probability variable state, latent probability state, normal state, etc.), or indicate whether the first symbol is changed. It is indicated by the lighting state whether it is medium (during dynamic display for stopping and displaying the combination of symbols for indicating the lottery result), and whether the stopped symbol is a symbol corresponding to a big win that is advantageous to the player or disadvantageous. Whether a pattern corresponding to a big hit or a lost pattern is indicated by a lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by a lighting state, and the number of rounds during a big hit and an error are displayed by a 7-segment display device. A plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED has a different emission color (for example, red, green, blue), and the combinations of the emission colors can suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. In this embodiment, various game states are notified by a combination of light emitting colors of the light emitting means (7-segment display device). For example, various game states may be notified by varying the length (blinking mode) of the period in which the light emitting means is lit and the period in which it is extinguished.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery (lottery for special symbols) is triggered by the entry (winning) of a ball into the upper first ball entrance 64b1, the lower first ball entrance 64b2, or the second ball entrance 640. is done. Then, in the lottery of the special symbols, the success or failure determination (big hit lottery) of whether or not it is a big hit is performed. Here, based on the fact that it is determined that the jackpot has been won, a jackpot game is executed in which the privilege game state is advantageous to the player.

When the jackpot game is executed, the specific winning opening 65a of the left variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the right variable winning device 650 becomes an open state in which it is possible to easily win a ball. A game is executed in which many prize balls can be obtained in a short period of time by winning balls. During this jackpot game, it is executed after the lottery result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), and the opening period of a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) (the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65, or , a period in which a closed state in which it is difficult for a ball to enter the V winning port 650a of the right variable winning device 650 is set, a round game period in which the open state is set, and one round game period After the end of the next A predetermined period (e.g., 0.5 seconds) until the start of the round game, an interval period in which the closed state is set, and a predetermined period (e.g., 2 seconds) after the end of the last round game period. A jackpot game period consisting of an ending period in which a state is set is set.

In this way, by setting the opening period after the lottery result of the special symbol indicating the winning of the jackpot is stopped (confirmed display), the ball is released in accordance with the timing when each prize opening is opened during the jackpot game. Since it is possible to make preparations for firing in an arbitrary direction, it is possible to smoothly perform a big winning game. In addition, since this opening period can be used as a period for informing the player of the game content of the current jackpot game, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game.

In addition, by setting the ending period as the final period of the jackpot game, it is possible to suppress the execution of a lottery of new special symbols immediately after the end of the last round game. Since it is possible to make preparations for shooting the ball in an arbitrary direction toward the game to be executed, it is possible to smoothly switch the game.

Furthermore, when it is determined as a big win in the big win lottery, the kind of the big win is also determined. A detailed explanation will be given later, but the types of jackpots to be determined are 16 rounds of the jackpot game, and after the jackpot ends, a high probability state of special symbols and a low probability of normal symbols are given. 16R potential jackpot, jackpot The number of rounds of the game is 2 rounds, a high probability state of special patterns after the big win, the 2R latent jackpot in which a low probability of normal patterns is given, and the high probability state of special patterns after the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 2 rounds and the big wins are finished. , There is prepared a 2R probability variable jackpot that gives a low probability state of normal symbols.

In addition, in some cases where it is determined that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is not the above-mentioned jackpot but a loss, the player is given less benefits than the above-mentioned jackpot (for example, the right variable winning device 650 is used only for one round). Privilege to open) A small hit is prepared. The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a big win (whether or not it is a small win) as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but also indicate the big win when the result is a big win. A pattern corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed.

In this embodiment, as the game state, any one of "normal state", "latent probability state", and "probability variable state" is configured to be set (see FIG. 14). The normal state is a game state in which the special symbol jackpot probability is set to a low probability (1/229) and the normal symbol hit probability is set to a low probability (11/233) (hereinafter, special symbols: low probability state, Normal pattern: called low probability state), and in the latent state, the special pattern jackpot probability is set to a high probability (1/120), and the normal pattern hit probability is set to a low probability (11/233). A gaming state (hereinafter, special symbol: high probability state, normal symbol: low probability state), and the variable state is a special symbol jackpot probability set to a high probability (1/120), normal symbol hit Probability is a game state (hereinafter referred to as special symbol: high probability state, normal symbol: high probability state) set to high probability (232/233).

Although detailed description will be given later, in the present embodiment, even if the special symbol jackpot is won and the same jackpot type is set, the gaming state that is set when the jackpot is won , the game state to be set after the end of the jackpot game is made different. As a result, the player can play the game while being conscious of the set game state in addition to the result of the lottery of the special symbols.

Here, "16R potential jackpot" means that after a jackpot game with a maximum number of rounds of 16 rounds (a jackpot game in which the right variable winning device (second attacker) 650 is opened for 16 rounds), a state of high probability of special symbols is entered. It is a jackpot that can be shifted, and when the low probability state of normal symbols is set after the jackpot game, the potential state is set as the game state after the jackpot game. It should be noted that the game state set after the end of the jackpot game when the "16R potential jackpot" is won is variably set according to the game state when the jackpot is won, as described above.

Here, the "2R potential jackpot" means that after a jackpot game with a maximum number of rounds of 2 rounds (a jackpot game in which the left variable prize winning device (first attacker) 65 is opened for two rounds), a state with a high probability of special symbols is entered. It is a jackpot that can be shifted, and when the low probability state of normal symbols is set after the jackpot game, the potential state is set as the game state after the jackpot game.

"2R probability variable jackpot" is a jackpot game with a maximum number of rounds of 2 rounds (the left variable winning device (first attacker) 65 is opened for 2 rounds, and after the jackpot game, a high probability of normal symbols and a high probability of special symbols) is set and probability variation is set as the gaming state.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, when a jackpot game corresponding to the "16R potential jackpot" is executed, the right variable prize winning device (second attacker) 650 is activated for a predetermined period (30 seconds have passed, or 10 balls Since the game (round game) to be opened (a period until winning) is executed a predetermined number of times (16 times), a right hitting game (a game in which a ball is shot aiming at the right variable winning device 650) during the jackpot game. , the winning ball in the right variable winning device 650 can be made to flow down to the special discharge channel 650e2.

On the other hand, in the jackpot game corresponding to the "2R probability variable jackpot", the opening action of the left variable winning device (first attacker) 65 is more restricted than the jackpot game corresponding to the "16R potential jackpot" described above. be done. Specifically, a game (round game) in which the left variable winning device (first attacker) 65 is opened for a short period of time (0.5 seconds) during one jackpot game, and a jackpot game that is executed only twice. executed.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description is continued. At the lower left side of the game area formed on the surface of the game board 13, a general ball entry hole 63 is provided through which 10 balls are paid out as prize balls. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b are triggered by entering the upper first ball entrance 64b1, the lower first ball entrance 64b2, and the second ball entrance 640 (start winning). To the third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs the variable display of the third pattern while synchronizing with the variable display in the normal pattern start port (through gate) 67 A second pattern display device (not shown) is provided, which is composed of an LED that variably displays the second pattern triggered by the passage of the ball. A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a 15-inch large liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle and lower three patterns. A column of symbols is displayed. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are horizontally scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加It's like In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). Decorative display according to the display of the pattern display devices 37a and 37b is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

The second symbol display device displays a symbol "○" and a symbol "x" as display symbols (second symbol (not shown)) each time the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67. A variable display is performed by alternately lighting up for a predetermined period of time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that a ball has passed through a normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device stops and displays the symbol "○" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first ball entrance 64b2 is It is configured to be in an operating state (open state) only for a predetermined time.

In addition, as a process for determining that an illegal game (right-handed game during normal state) is being performed and notifying an abnormality, the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol is a predetermined number (2 or more) due to the right-handed game It is preferable to configure so that an abnormality notification is executed when it is determined that the number of Therefore, it may be configured such that the abnormality notification is executed when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 as a trigger. As a result, it is possible to prevent a small amount (one shot) of the ball shot due to the player's operation error from entering the right area, and the execution of the abnormality notification.

In addition, in the high probability state of the normal pattern (normal high probability), using other methods such as increasing the probability of winning, increasing the opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 64a for one hit When the ball is likely to enter the lower first ball entrance 64b2, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than the normal state during normal pattern high probability, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the game state, and one winning The opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 64a may be fixed regardless of the game state.

The normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left area of the variable display device unit 80, and among the balls launched to the game board, a part of the balls flowing down the right side of the game board. (about 50%) are configured to be passable. When the ball passes through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 is reserved up to four times in total, and the number of reserved balls is displayed on the second symbol reservation lamp 84 described above. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 corresponding to the maximum number of holding lamps are provided, and arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81 .

In addition, the variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the present embodiment. A part of the pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . In addition, the maximum number of held balls for passing the ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is not limited to 4 times, but is set to 3 times or less or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). You can In addition, the number of normal symbol starting openings (through gates) 67 to be assembled is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Further, the mounting position of the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 is not limited to the left side of the variable display device unit 80, but may be the right side of the variable display device unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol reservation lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, an upper first ball entrance 64b1 through which a ball can enter is provided. When the ball enters the first ball inlet 64b1, the first ball inlet switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first ball inlet switch is turned on. Then, the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) draws a jackpot lottery, and the first symbol display device 37a displays the result of the lottery.

Below the upper first ball entrance 64b1, a lower first ball entrance 64b2 through which a ball can enter is arranged. When the ball enters the lower first ball inlet 64b2, the first ball inlet switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first ball inlet switch is turned on. Then, the main controller 110 (see FIG. 9) draws a large winning lottery, and the first symbol display device 37a displays the result of the lottery.

A second ball entrance 640 through which a ball can enter is arranged in the right side of the lower first ball entrance 64b2 and in the right area of the game board 13 (the area below the passage unit 3660). . When the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, a second ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second ball entrance switch is turned on. A big win lottery is performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the first symbol display device 37b. In addition, a general ball entrance 63 is provided in the left area of the game board.

When a ball enters the upper first ball entrance 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance 64b2, four balls are paid out as prize balls, and when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640, one ball is awarded. It is configured to be paid out as prize balls. Also, when a ball enters the general ball entrance 63, one ball is paid out as a prize ball. By configuring in this way, even if a right-handed game is played in the normal state, the number of balls increases because the ball only enters the second ball entrance 640 in which the number of prize balls is set to one. nothing to do

Also, when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the lottery for the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed. A long-time (for example, 10 minutes) variation pattern (variation time) is set as a variation pattern (variation time) set for the lottery of 2 special symbols (special figure 2). Therefore, even if the lottery for the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed in the normal state, it is possible to efficiently suppress the lottery for the special figure 2 from being executed.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the normal state is set as the game state, a left-handed game (to make the ball flow down to the left area of the game board 13 and execute the first special symbol (special figure 1) lottery In addition, playing a game for making the ball enter the upper first ball entrance 64b1 is a game advantageous to the player.

In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the upper first ball entrance 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance 64b2 and the number of winning balls when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 However, the number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the upper first ball entrance 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance 64b2 and the second entrance ball The number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the opening 640 is the same number, for example, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the upper first ball entrance 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance 64b2. The number may also be configured as one.

As shown in FIG. 2, an electric accessory 640a is attached to the lower first entrance 64b2. This electric accessory 64a is configured in a single wing shape, and has a closed state (see FIG. 2) that restricts the ball from entering the lower first ball entrance 64b2, and a state where the ball enters the lower first ball entrance 64b2. It is variably controlled to an open state (see FIG. 3) that allows the ball to enter 64b2.

The electric accessory 64a is normally positioned in a closed state, and is configured so that a ball cannot enter the lower first ball entrance 64b2. Then, based on the fact that a win is won by the lottery of the normal pattern (second pattern), it is variably operated to the open state for a predetermined period so that the ball can easily enter the lower first ball entrance 64b2. It is configured.

As shown in FIG. 3, on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side of the case rail 132; ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In the main controller 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as the setting of the jackpot lottery, the display settings of the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display results of the second symbol display device. to run.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc., and a stack area for storing various flags, counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the second symbol display device, the second symbol reservation lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing driving and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side as a front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these through the input/output port 205 to send.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253 .

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. . The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51 , and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 .

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effects. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, and the like. The other devices 228 include various drive motors for operating drive accessories for presentation provided in the pachinko machine 10 .

Sound lamp control device 113, based on various commands (fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from main control device 110, determines the display mode of third symbol display device 81, and sends the determined display mode to the command The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the rear image is an image displayed on the rear side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .

When the frame button 22 is operated by the player, an accessory drive command is transmitted to the other device 228 in order to drive an accessory for performance (not shown), or a command corresponding to the operation content of the frame button 22 is sent. A sound output command for outputting sound to the sound output device 226 is set, and a lamp output command for causing the lamp display device 227 to emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the operation content of the frame button 22 is set. can be configured to

Also, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114 . In the audio lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, output the audio corresponding to the display content from the audio output device 226, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 changes the third pattern, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 . The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 4). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 4) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 7(a). FIGS. 5A and 5B are schematic diagrams schematically showing the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 in this embodiment. The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114, which will be described later, so that, for example, three pattern rows (upper, middle, and lower) ( L1 to L3) are displayed (see FIG. 5(a)). The third design displayed on the display screen of the third design display device 81 (decorative design that fluctuates corresponding to the fluctuation display of the first special design (special design 1) or the second special design (special design 2)) is Each pattern consists of 10 types of main symbols to which identification information imitating numbers "0" to "9" is added.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the main symbols are formed using different types of characters (animals, etc.) for each piece of identification information imitating numerals. In this way, by using characters corresponding to each piece of identification information, it is possible to visually inform the player of the lottery result of the special symbol, so that the player can play an easy-to-understand game. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the lottery by the main controller 110, which will be described later, is a big hit, the same main symbols (for example, "777") are displayed in a variable display, and the variable display is performed. It is configured so that a jackpot occurs after the is over. That is, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol by the main control device 110 .

In the main display area Dm, three pattern rows L1, L2 and L3 are displayed, respectively, upper, middle and lower. The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows L1 to L3. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, and each of the symbol rows L1 to L3 is periodically scrolled in the left-right direction for variable display.

More specifically, the upper symbol row L1 and the middle symbol row L2 are arranged so that the numbers are arranged in ascending order from right to left, and are scrolled from right to left to be variably displayed. In the lower pattern row L3, the numbers are arranged in ascending order from left to right, and are scrolled from right to left to be variably displayed. Further, in each symbol row, sub-symbols (blank symbols) which do not indicate the special symbol lottery results are formed between the main symbols.

As shown in FIG. 5A, the main display area Dm has three effective lines V1 to V3 formed vertically and two effective lines V4 and V5 formed obliquely. In a state in which the symbol rows L1 to L3 are stopped and displayed, the third symbols are stopped in a combination of the jackpot symbols (the same combination of the main symbols in the first embodiment) on the activated line. , a jackpot video is displayed as a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 5(a), in the first embodiment, each activated line (V1 to V5) is formed to include the symbol display positions of each of the symbol rows L1 to L3. Until all of the symbol rows L1 to L3 displayed in the main display area Dm of the display device 81 are stopped and displayed, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the lottery results of the corresponding special symbols. Therefore, until the last symbol row (in this embodiment, the middle symbol row L2) is stop-displayed, the variable display of the third symbol executed in the main display area Dm can be made interesting.

In addition, the mode of the variable display of the third symbols in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the one described above, and is arbitrary. The number of symbols in the row can be changed as appropriate. Also, the patterns displayed in a variable manner on the third pattern display device 81 are not limited to the above. Further, the area where the third symbol is variably displayed may be configured to be variable. For example, when a specific effect is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the variable display area of the third symbol or moving the variable display area to a position that is difficult for the player to visually recognize (for example, a corner of the display screen), making it difficult for the player to understand whether the third symbol is changing. You may make it Also, during the period when the special symbol is fluctuating, the fluctuation of the third symbol may be temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) and then changed again.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol and the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol are the same (to the extent that the player has difficulty distinguishing ), but the display mode and display area of the third symbol may be changed so as to correspond to the type of special symbol that is fluctuating.

Next, the contents actually displayed on the third pattern display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 5(b). As shown in FIG. 5B, small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 are formed on the upper right side of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front. These small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 are areas where identification information (fourth pattern) for indicating the lottery status of special symbols (whether or not the lottery is in progress (fluctuating) and the lottery result) is displayed. Then, the fourth symbol (special figure 1 fourth symbol) for indicating the lottery situation of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is displayed in the small display area Dm1, and the lottery situation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) The fourth pattern (special figure 2 fourth pattern) for indicating is configured to be displayed in the small display area Dm2.

By providing the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 in this manner, the player can be notified of the lottery status of the special symbol in the pachinko machine 10 in which the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 can be changed at the same time. Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fourth symbol is displayed in a display mode using numbers, and by variably displaying the fourth symbol in the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2, (Refer to FIG. 6(a)), showing a situation where the special symbols are fluctuating, and by stopping and displaying the fourth symbol in the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 (see FIG. 6(a)), a special symbol lottery Although it is configured to show the results, it is not limited to this, for example, a display mode imitating a figure as the fourth pattern, a display mode in which a figure is deformed using a display mode showing a plurality of colors, It is also possible to show that the special patterns are changing by a display mode in which the colors are variable, and to display the lottery results of the special patterns by stopping and displaying the display modes showing the specific patterns and colors.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the fourth symbol is used to indicate the special symbol lottery situation (whether or not the lottery is in progress (during fluctuation), and the lottery result), but this is not the only option. Instead, it may be configured to notify only whether or not the special symbol is in the process of lottery (during fluctuation). Further, as shown in FIG. 5(b), in the present embodiment, the fourth symbol display areas (small display areas Dm1, Dm2) in which the fourth symbol for indicating the special symbol lottery status is displayed are displayed as the main display. Although an example is shown in which the fourth pattern display area is formed on the upper right side of the area Dm, the position and size of the fourth pattern display area may be changed according to the effect mode of the variable effect executed in the central portion of the main display area Dm. can be different.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the fourth symbol display area from restricting the area in which the variable effect is executed and lowering the effect of the effect. In this case, the fourth pattern display area is deleted from the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, and the variable display of the fourth pattern is performed using light emitting means (such as LEDs) provided in the variable display device unit 80. should be configured to run

A small display area Dm3 is formed in the upper left of the main display area Dm in front view. In this small display area Dm3, a guidance display mode for guiding the player in the direction in which the ball is to be shot (game direction) is displayed (see FIG. 6(a)).

In this embodiment, the small display area Dm3 is used as the guidance display area. With this configuration, the player can easily grasp which area of the game board the ball should be shot to by simply looking at the guide display mode displayed in the guide display area. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for players to understand.

In this guide display area (small display area Dm3), a display mode of "right-handed" for guiding the player to play a right-handed game, and a display mode of "right-handed" to guide the player to play a left-handed game. and a display mode of ``left-handed'' for guiding the player. It is displayed during a latent state and during a specific jackpot game (during a jackpot game in which the right variable winning device 650 is opened), and the display mode of "left hit" is displayed for a predetermined period after the right hit game ends (for example, , 10 seconds) is configured to be displayed. In addition, even when it is detected that a right-handed game is being executed during a game state in which a left-handed game is advantageous to the player, that is, a normal state or a variable probability state, a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) " It is configured so that the display mode of "left-handed" is displayed.

Returning to FIG. 5B, the description is continued. Small display areas Dm1a and Dm2a are formed to the left of the fourth pattern display area (small display areas Dm1 and Dm2). The small display areas Dm1a and Dm2a are areas in which a reserved number display mode for indicating the number of reserved balls of each special symbol is displayed. The special figure 1 reserved information for indicating the number of memories) is displayed, and the special figure 2 reserved information for indicating the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved memories) of the second special symbol is displayed in the small display area Dm2a.

Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 6(a), but the small display areas Dm1a and Dm2a store the stored winning information in advance in addition to the values for indicating the number of pending balls of the corresponding special symbols. The determination result (prefetch result) is configured to be displayed in a display mode capable of suggesting and notifying the player. By constructing in this way, the player can play the game while having expectations for the game to be executed in the future (lottery result of the special symbols reserved and stored).

Furthermore, a sub-display area Ds is formed below the main display area Dm. As shown in FIG. 6(a), the sub-display area Ds is configured to display comments on the content of the game being played. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand. The sub-display area Ds may be used for another purpose. For example, the sub-display area Ds may display information for indicating the number of reserved balls of each special symbol shown in the small display areas Dm4 and Dm5. may be configured.

In this case, for example, it is preferable to display a reserved display mode (for example, a circular reserved symbol display mode) for individually indicating the number of reserved balls of each special symbol in the sub-display area Ds. Then, it is preferable that the player can grasp the current number of reserved balls of the special symbol according to the number of display of the reserved display mode. Further, it is preferable to determine in advance the winning information corresponding to each reserved special symbol, and to vary the corresponding reserved display mode based on the determination result.

By constructing in this way, the game is played while expecting to win a big prize in the lottery of the special symbols corresponding to the reserved symbols whose display mode is changed among the possible plurality of reserved symbols. can let Furthermore, unlike the present embodiment, since it is configured to display reserved symbols corresponding to the number of individual reserved memories, a display mode for showing a game result that can be advantageous to the player among a plurality of reserved symbols. It is possible to set a result display that easily displays the variable reserved symbol display.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, in addition to this, the game result suggesting mode for suggesting the game result (lottery result of each symbol) to the player, and the content of the effect display executed in the main display area Dm. The effect explanation mode for explanation, the frame button related display mode for indicating the timing of operating the frame button 22 and the result of the operation, and the win related information display mode for displaying information about the big win game are displayed in the sub display area Ds. The ratio of the display area between the main display area Dm and the sub-display area Ds is set to differ depending on the content to be displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

In addition, when the combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed is a combination corresponding to a loss and there is a held ball, a variable display corresponding to a lottery based on the held ball is started after the stop display for 1 second. . In addition, when there are a plurality of reserved balls, a lottery is executed based on the reserved ball corresponding to the oldest incoming ball in terms of time.

On the other hand, when the third pattern of the combination corresponding to the missing of the special pattern is stop-displayed for one second in the absence of the reserved ball, the stop-display of the third pattern continues thereafter. This state is when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses or when a new ball enters the upper first ball inlet 64b1, the lower first ball inlet 64b2, or the second ball inlet 640. Continue until the ball hits. Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since the third symbol was stop-displayed, a demonstration effect indicating that the game is not being executed is displayed. Despite the fact that the player continuously shoots the ball for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the ball is shot in any of the upper first ball entrance 64b1, the lower first ball entrance 64b2, and the second ball entrance 640. It is rare that the third symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds). This is due to the fact that no games are played by

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed after the third symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and the demonstration effect is started. do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily judge whether the game is being played based on the presence or absence of display of the demonstration performance. On the other hand, a new ball enters any one of the upper first ball entrance 64b1, the lower first ball entrance 64b2, or the second ball entrance 640 before a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses. In this case, the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the new incoming ball is executed.

6 and 7, description will be given of the effect contents displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. This third pattern display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first pattern display device 37 . For example, when a ball enters the upper 1 ball entrance 64b1, the lower 1st ball entrance 64b2, or the 2nd ball entrance 640 (start winning), it triggers the first special Variation display of the symbol (special figure 1) or the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed. Furthermore, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronism with the variable display of the special symbol 1 or special symbol 2, the variable performance of the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is performed.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be variably displayed at the same time. are configured differently. Then, the lottery (fluctuation) is executed in the game state in which the third pattern, which is the target of the variable performance executed by the third pattern display device 81, is set among the first special pattern and the second special pattern. It is configured to be the third pattern corresponding to the special pattern that is likely to be played. By constructing in this way, it is possible to make it easy to always execute the variable performance using the third symbol, regardless of which game state is set, and to enhance the performance effect.

First, with reference to FIGS. 7(b) and (c), the latent state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set after the end of the jackpot game of the present embodiment. Explain the flow. In this embodiment, different game states are set after the end of the big win according to the kind of the big win. And when the latent definite state is set after the end of the jackpot, the special figure 2 game (right-handed game) is set so as to be advantageous to the player. In the special figure 2 game, it is set to win a small win so as to be advantageous to the player and a big win D which is most advantageous to the player.

However, in this embodiment, it is a simultaneous variation type gaming machine, and when there is a ball in the upper 1 entrance 64b1 or the lower 1st entrance 64b2 during the special figure 2 game, the special figure 1 fluctuates. However, there is a risk that the player will win a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player, and that a game will be provided that gives the player a sense of distrust. In order to eliminate the game, in this embodiment, if you win a small hit in the special figure 2 lottery and you win a big hit in the special figure 1, the lottery result (fluctuation result) is forced to stop or temporarily stopped. configured to be Then, in the game in which the latent definite state is displayed after the end of the big hit, when there is a reserved ball in the special figure 1, the right-handed game is quickly executed, and the ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640 to make a small hit. The third symbol display device 81 is configured to display an effect prompting to win.

First, with reference to FIG. 7(b), the flow of the display of the effect when there is no special figure 1 reserved ball at the time of the ED in the jackpot that shifts to the latent definite state after the jackpot ends will be described. If there is no special figure 1 reserved ball at the end of the jackpot (ED) (see FIG. 7 (b) A), the super mode ED effect corresponding to the latent state is executed as the display content, and at the end of the ED (FIG. 7 If there is no special figure 1 reserved ball in (b) B), the effect of super mode (mode corresponding to the latent state) is displayed.

On the other hand, if there is a special figure 1 reserved ball at the ED of the jackpot, the latent state is set as the game state, but the dash mode is displayed to prompt the player to quickly execute the right-handed game. Configure. FIG. 7(c) is a diagram showing the flow of production when there are 1 to 4 special-figure 1 reserved balls at the ED of the jackpot in the jackpot that shifts to the latent state after the jackpot ends. As shown in FIG. 7(c), if there is a pending number of balls at the ending of the jackpot (see FIG. 7(c)A), the ending for dash is displayed.

Specifically, description will be made with reference to FIG. FIG. 6(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when there is only the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 at the ending of the jackpot. A rabbit character 811 and a tortoise character 814 are displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, and the characters are used to provide an easy-to-understand performance for the player. This character 811 is configured so as not to appear (not be displayed) during the period in which the normal state is set. A game state advantageous to the player (a game state more advantageous than the normal state) is set. With this configuration, the player can grasp the outline of the currently set game state by grasping whether or not the character 811 is displayed on the display screen, so that the game can be easily understood. can provide.

Then, when there is only the special figure 1 reserved ball at the ending of the jackpot, the guidance display mode of "Right shot" is displayed in the display area Dm3, and "Right shot" is displayed in the sub display area Ds to encourage the right shot Hurry up and hit the right to reach the goal before the turtle!!" is displayed. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that it is necessary to hit the ball to the right in a hurry. In addition, in the small display area Dm4a to small display area Dm4e, a display mode suggesting the remaining special figure 1 holding balls and the number of digests is displayed. Specifically, if the number of reserved balls is 0, Dm4a, if the number of reserved balls is 1, Dm4a to Dm4b, if the number of reserved balls is 2, Dm4a to Dm4c, the number of reserved balls is In the case of 3, Dm4a to Dm4d are lit up, and in the case of 4, Dm4a to Dm4e are lit up. Then, "GOAL" is displayed in the small display area 0, and it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the mode is aimed at setting the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 to 0.

Returning to FIG. 7(c), the description is continued. It was mentioned above that the ending for the dash mode is displayed when there is a special figure 1 reserved ball number at the ending of the jackpot (see FIG. 7 (c) (A)), but the ED ends and the state shifts to the latent state. If there is a special figure 1 reserved ball in the case (see FIG. 7 (c) (B)), the dash mode is displayed as an effect.

Here, with reference to FIG. 6(b), the dash mode display screen displayed when the latent definite state occurs in a state where there is a special figure 1 reserved ball number will be described. FIG. 6B is a diagram showing an example of display contents in the dash mode. In this embodiment, during the latent certainty state, it is configured to be advantageous to the player to enter the ball into the second ball entrance 640 by the right-handed game and to execute the lottery (fluctuation) of the second special symbol. It is Then, when a big win or a small win is won with the second special symbol, it is possible to temporarily stop the variation (lottery) of the first special symbol or forcibly stop it due to a loss. Furthermore, in the lottery of the second special symbols during the latent sure game, 1/2 is configured to win a small hit, and the fluctuation time is also in the latent state, the first special symbol is better than the second special symbol. Since a long variation time is set, the possibility of winning a jackpot disadvantageous to the player with the first special symbol during the variation of the second special symbol is extremely rare.

However, if the player does not execute the right-handed game when only the first special symbol has the number of reserved balls after the transition to the latent certainty state, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol passes and the player wins a big win that is disadvantageous to the player. There was a possibility that it would be lost. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when there is a reserved ball of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit, instead of the super mode displayed during the latent state, the dash mode for prompting the player to execute the right-handed game is displayed, and an effect for digesting the reserved ball of the first special symbol is executed.

In FIG. 7B, in the center of the main display area Dm, a character 811 imitating a rabbit and a character 814 imitating a tortoise are displayed in the center of the display screen as they compete for the GOAL 812. , a comment "Hurry up and hit right!!" is displayed. Furthermore, the guidance display mode of "right-handed" is also displayed in the small display area Dm3. Thus, by displaying a display mode for guiding right-handed hitting in both the sub-display area Ds and the small display area Dm3, it is possible to inform the player of the right-handed game in an emphasized manner. In addition, by varying the content of the guidance display mode for guiding the player to a proper game method according to the degree of disadvantage to the player, the player can continue to play games that are disadvantageous. It can be suppressed.

Then, the small display area Dm1 and the small display area Dm2 display that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are fluctuating, and the small display area Dm2a displays the number of held balls of the second special symbol. is displayed. Further, the small display area Dm1a displays that the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is one. Therefore, as described above, the small display areas Dm4a to Dm4b are illuminated to indicate that the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is one.

Returning to FIG. 7(c), the description is continued. The dash mode ends when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol becomes 0, and is switched to a super mode effect corresponding to the latent certainty state.

Here, the display screen indicating the end of the dash mode will be described with reference to FIG. 7(a). In this embodiment, as described above, when a big hit or a small hit is won with the second special symbol, the fluctuation of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped or forcedly stopped with the missing symbol, and the dash mode is By winning a small prize with the second special symbol during the latent definite state, the super mode ends when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol becomes 0, and indicates the latent definite state to the player. display mode.

In the center of the main display area Dm, a rabbit-like character 811 competing in the dash mode passes through the GOAL 812 ahead of a turtle-like character 814 . A comment "GOAL!!" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the dash mode has ended.

Then, the fourth symbol is stop-displayed in the small display area Dm2 in the display mode "246" indicating that the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit, and at the same time, the first special symbol is displayed in the small display area Dm1. The fourth symbol is forcibly stop-displayed in the display mode "357" indicating that the lottery result of (1) is lost. In addition, the upper display area Dm4a is illuminated to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has disappeared, and the dash mode is terminated.

In this embodiment, when a small win is won with the second special symbol, Dm1 displaying the variation result of the first special symbol is configured to forcibly stop the lost symbol as it is, but this variation result is read ahead, When it is determined that the game will win a big hit, the game may be displayed by changing the stop display mode or the color of the number of prize balls due to the small hit when the game is forcibly stopped due to the winning pattern. By constructing in this way, the player can obtain a sense of security that he or she can be prevented from winning a disadvantageous jackpot. Also, when the result of the prefetching is a big hit, the color of the variable display may be changed and displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand, and to further enhance the performance effect.

<Regarding Transition of Game State of Pachinko Machine 10 in First Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 8, transition of the game state of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 8 is a transition diagram showing the flow of game states set in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 8, in the first embodiment, the game state includes normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), variable state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability of normal symbols) probability state), latent probability state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), and three game states can be set. A predetermined game state is set according to the state (see FIGS. 13 and 14).

First, the case where the normal state is set as the game state will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the initial state (the state in which the processing when it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 9) is operated in the start-up processing (see FIG. 51) of the main controller 110 is executed ), the normal state is set as the game state.

In this normal state, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special pattern (special pattern 1), if jackpot A (71% of jackpot wins) is set as the jackpot type, it is restarted after the jackpot game ends. A normal state is set, a jackpot A (50% of jackpot winnings) is set, and a variable probability state (challenge mode) is set after the jackpot game ends. Also, the jackpot B (25% of jackpot winnings) and jackpot C (4% of jackpot winnings) are configured to be set to a latent state (super mode) after the jackpot game ends. On the other hand, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special pattern (special pattern 2) during the normal state, the jackpot D is set as the jackpot type (100% of jackpot wins), and after the jackpot game ends, the jackpot D is set. It is configured so that a certain state (super mode) is set.

In other words, if you win a jackpot in the special drawing 1 lottery in the normal state, you enter the challenge mode with a probability of 71%, enter the super mode with a probability of 29%, and if you win a jackpot in the special drawing 2 lottery. is configured to set a probability variable state with a probability of 100%.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the game state set after the jackpot game is different depending on the game content during the jackpot game, so that the game performed during the jackpot game can be made more interesting. can be done.

Next, the flow of the transition of the game state when the variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set as the game state will be described. In this embodiment, while the variable probability state is set, the left-handed game is executed, and the lottery of the special figure 1 is executed. Then, if the jackpot is won in the lottery of the special figure 1 during the probability change state, when the jackpot A (60% of the jackpot winning) is set as the jackpot type, after the jackpot game ends, the probability change state (challenge mode ) is set to loop. Also, when the jackpot B (25% of the jackpot wins) and the jackpot C (15% of the jackpot wins) are set, the probability state (super mode) is set.

On the other hand, when the probability variable state is set as the game state, if the jackpot is won in the special drawing 2 lottery executed based on the reserved and stored special drawing 2, the jackpot D (jackpot) is selected as the jackpot type. 100% of winning) is set. It is configured such that the variable probability state is set again after the jackpot game ends.

In other words, if you win a jackpot in the special figure 1 lottery in the probability state, the probability state (challenge mode) is set to loop with a probability of 60%, and the probability state (super mode) is set with a probability of 40%. be done. Then, when a big hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery, the variable probability state is set with a probability of 100%.

Finally, the flow of transition of the game state in the state in which the potential state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set as the game state will be described. In this embodiment, while the latent certainty state is set, a game that mainly executes the lottery of the special figure 2 is performed by the right hitting game. When a big win is won in the lottery of special figure 2, when a big win D (100% of winning a big win) is set as a kind of big win, a latent state is set again after the big win game is finished.

On the other hand, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the special figure 1 in a state where the latent probability state is set as the game state, if jackpot A (60% of the jackpot winning) is set as the jackpot type, the jackpot is set. After the end of the game, the probability variable state is set, and when the jackpot B (25% of the jackpot winning) and the jackpot C (15% of the jackpot winning) are set, the probability state (super mode) is set again after the jackpot game is over. set.

In other words, if you win a big hit in the special figure 1 lottery in the latent state, the full power mode (latent certainty state) is looped with a probability of 40%, and the probability variable state is set with a probability of 60%, and the special figure 2 lottery When a jackpot is won in , the latent state (super mode) is looped with a probability of 100%.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the latent certainty state is set, the latent certainty state, which is a game state in which the player is more advantageous to execute the lottery of the special figure 2, can be reliably looped. Therefore, the special symbol 2 is a special symbol that executes a lottery that is more advantageous to the player than the special symbol 1.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the number of big wins reaches three times, the normal state is always set after the third big win game is completed. Therefore, when winning the jackpot type shifting to the latent definite state in the first jackpot, the next two jackpots can be executed the special figure 2 game that wins the jackpot D that is most advantageous to the player without fail.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the state in which the game state other than the latent state is set, that is, the execution of the lottery of the special figure 1 is defined as an appropriate game method. If the special figure 2 game is executed during the game state and the jackpot is won, the latent state that is most advantageous to the player is set, and there is a risk that the player will be given an excessive privilege. There is

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the special figure 2 lottery is executed in a state where the normal state is set, it is configured to set a long time (10 minutes) fluctuation time. As a result, it is possible to prevent the special figure 2 lottery from being frequently executed in the normal state, so that excessive benefits (privileges for setting an advantageous game state) are given to the player in the normal state. can be suppressed.

In addition, in the normal state, which is a low probability state of normal symbols, even if a game (right-handed game) different from the proper game (left-handed game) is executed and the special figure 2 lottery is executed, the player It can be suppressed that an excessive privilege (a privilege for setting an advantageous gaming state) is given to the player.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the probability variable state is set, the special symbol jackpot probability is set to a higher probability than the state where the normal state is set, and the ball enters the second ball entrance 640. By configuring it so that it is difficult to enter, the special figure 2 lottery is configured to be difficult to execute. , To set the jackpot probability of special symbols to a high probability, and to make it easier to execute a new special 2 lottery (to make it easier to execute a special 2 lottery than a special 1 lottery). It may be configured to set the variable time and the variable time of the special symbol, specifically, the state in which the variable probability state is set is the second special symbol than the state in which the normal state is set. It may be configured such that the time set as the variable time is short (for example, 3 minutes).

By configuring in this way, when the probability variable state is set, the game that draws the first special symbol (special figure 1) aiming at the transition to the latent probability state, which is the most advantageous gaming state for the player. (Left-handed game) and there is no transition to a latent state, but by executing many special symbol lotteries, the second special symbol (special symbol) with the aim of seeing various fluctuation effects (jackpot effect) The player can select 2) a game in which the lottery is performed (right-handed game).

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

In the main control device 110, the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the display setting in the first symbol display device 37, the display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and the display setting in the third symbol display device 81 Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 9, counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram schematically showing counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. These counters, etc. are the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the setting of the display in the first design display device 37, the setting of the display in the second design display device 83, and the setting of the display in the third design display device 81. etc., it is used in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 .

In order to select the special symbol lottery and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first winning random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol jackpot type. The first hit type counter C2 used for , the stop type selection counter (not shown) used to select the stop type of the special symbol, and the small type used to select the small hit type of the special symbol A winning type counter C5, a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1, and a variation type counter CS1 used to select a variation pattern are used.

In addition, the second winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used to set the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4, and the variation used for selecting the variation pattern of the normal symbols. A type counter CS1 is used. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 28), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 52). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 . In the RAM 203, a first special symbol reserved ball storage area corresponding to the ball entering the upper first ball entrance 64b1 and the lower first ball entrance 64b2 consisting of four reservation areas (reservation first to fourth areas) is stored. 203a, and a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b corresponding to the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 consisting of four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). In the 1 special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a first winning random number counter C1, a first winning type counter C2, and a stop Each value of the type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 is stored.

Then, when the starting condition (fluctuation condition) of the first special symbol is established, the various values stored in the reserved first area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a are shifted to the first special symbol execution area. , Special symbol variation based on various values stored is started.

Similarly, in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a first winning random number counter C1, a first winning type counter C2, a stop type selection counter C3, Each value of the small hit type counter C5 and the variation type counter CS1 is stored.

Then, when the starting condition (fluctuation condition) of the second special symbol is established, various values stored in the first reserved area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b are shifted to the second special symbol execution area. , Special symbol variation based on various values stored is started.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be capable of simultaneously (parallelly) executing the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol. Each reserved ball storage area (first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b) is configured to have an execution area. Thereby, when the starting condition of each special symbol is satisfied, the next special symbol variation can be quickly executed.

In this embodiment, only the second special symbol is configured to have a small hit as a lottery result, so that the value of the small hit type counter C5 is not stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. However, for example, it is configured to have a small hit as a lottery result of the first special symbol, and the value of the small hit type counter C5 is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. may be configured.

In addition, as in the present embodiment, even in the reserved ball storage area (first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a) corresponding to the special symbol type (first special symbol) that does not have a small hit as a lottery result, the small hit It may be configured to store the value of the type counter C5. In this way, regardless of the special symbol lottery specifications (whether or not there is a small hit), the starting port (upper first entrance 64b1, lower first entrance 64b2, second entrance) that triggers the special symbol lottery All the counter values acquired by the ball entering the mouth 640) are stored, and when the special symbol start condition (fluctuation condition) is satisfied, among the acquired counter values, it becomes necessary. Since the special symbol lottery is executed using only the value, the same configuration can be used for a plurality of gaming machines with different special symbol lottery specifications (whether or not there is a small win). , parts and technologies can be shared, and costs can be reduced.

Furthermore, in the RAM 203 of the present embodiment, as with the above-described special symbols, normal symbol holding corresponding to entering the ball (passing of the ball) into the through gate 67 consisting of four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas) A ball storage area 203c is provided, and in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, each value of the second random number counter C4 and the normal pattern variation type counter CS2 is set in accordance with the timing of entering the through gate 67. stored respectively.

Then, when the normal symbol start condition (fluctuation condition) is established, the various values stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c are shifted to the normal symbol execution area, and the stored various values are shifted to the normal symbol execution area. Normal design variation based on the value is started.

In this embodiment, each counter value acquired based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is reserved and stored, and each counter value acquired based on the ball passing through the through gate 67 is stored. Although it has a configuration to hold and store the value, it is not limited to this, and the function (holding storage function) to store each counter value acquired for each pattern (special pattern, normal pattern) is not provided. It may be configured as follows.

By constructing in this manner, in a game machine in which a lottery advantageous to a player and a lottery disadvantageous to a player are switched as a lottery for one special pattern type according to a set game state, an advantageous lottery is executed. It is possible to suppress a situation in which a different game state is set and a disadvantageous lottery is executed with one special symbol in a state in which many reserved memories of one special symbol are acquired.

Next, each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 479). It is configured to return to In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 479, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0 to 479. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 28) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 52).

The value of the first hit random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. It is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing. The value of the random number for the special symbol jackpot is set by the first winning random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is the first winning random number table. If it matches the value of the random number set by 202a as a big hit, it is determined as a special symbol big hit.

Here, the first winning random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 11(a). FIG. 11(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first winning random number table 202a. This first hit random number table 202a is a table that defines a random number value (determination value) that is determined as a big hit in the lottery for the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

Specifically, in the first hit random number table 202a, a judgment value for judging a big hit is defined in common for the types of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). A predetermined range of judgment values is defined corresponding to the state (low-probability state, high-probability state). As shown in FIG. 11(a), when the special symbol low probability state (normal state) is set, "7 to 8" among the values of the first per random number counter C1 is defined as the jackpot determination value. A value other than that is defined as a determination value other than a big hit (that is, a small hit or a loss).

In addition, when the high probability state of the special symbol (probability variable state, latent probability state) is set, "0 to 3" of the value of the first per random number counter C1 is defined as the jackpot determination value, A value other than the big hit (that is, a small hit or a loss) is defined as a judgment value. That is, in the present embodiment, when the low probability state of the special symbol is set, it is defined to win the jackpot with a probability of 2/458 (1/227), and the high probability state of the special symbol is If it is set, it is stipulated that the jackpot is won with a probability of 4/458 (1/109). Therefore, the high probability state of the special symbol becomes a game state in which it is easier to win the jackpot than the low probability state of the special symbol.

In the present embodiment, the probability of winning the jackpot is set to be the same between the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. The jackpot probability may be different depending on the type of the symbol. For example, the jackpot probability may be lower for the second special symbol than for the first special symbol. Also, in the present embodiment, two types of special symbol jackpot probabilities, ie, a high probability state and a low probability state, are prepared, but one type or three or more types may be used. In this case, for example, the special symbol jackpot probability may be changed for each of up to four game states set by combining the special symbol state and the normal symbol state, Simply, three or more special symbol states, such as a high probability state, a normal probability state, and a low probability state, may be set, and a different jackpot probability may be set for each state.

Further, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is also referred to when determining whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol wins a small winning. The value of the random number that becomes the small hit of the special symbol is set by the small hit random number table 202b stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first hit random number counter C1 obtained is the small hit random number table 202b. If it matches the value of the random number that becomes the small hit specified in , it is determined as a small hit of the special symbol.

Here, with reference to FIG.11(b), the small hit random number table 202b is demonstrated. FIG.11(b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content prescribed|regulated by the small hit random number table 202b. This small hit random number table 202b is a table in which random numbers (determined values) determined as small hits are defined in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

Specifically, in the small hit random number table 202b, the determination value determined to be a small hit is defined for each type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol), and the state of the special symbol (low A predetermined range of determination values is defined regardless of the probability state or high probability state. As shown in FIG. 11(b), when the symbol type is the first special symbol, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 corresponding to the small winning is not defined, and the first special symbol lottery results in a small winning. It is stipulated that there is no chance of winning.

On the other hand, when the symbol type is the second special symbol, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 corresponding to the small winning is defined within the range of "112 to 342". That is, in the present embodiment, the probability of winning a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol is 0 (no winning), and the probability of winning a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol is 224/458 (approximately 1/2). .1).

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11(a) and (b), the first winning random number counter C1 value for winning the big hit and the first winning random number counter C1 value for winning the small hit are set to be different. It is configured to continuously (simultaneously) execute the judgment of whether the big hit is successful and the judgment of the small hit in one process of executing the lottery of the special symbols (the process of determining the presence or absence of the hit). is doing.

By configuring in this manner, a big win or a small win lottery can be executed with a predetermined probability for one acquired counter value (first winning random number counter C1 value).

In addition, in the present embodiment, the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol are defined with different probabilities of winning a small hit. By configuring in this way, the privilege given to the player can be made different between the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol. In addition, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game in order to execute more advantageous special symbol lotteries. As described above, in the present embodiment, unless a specific game state (probable state) is set, the second special symbol lottery that is advantageous to the player is not frequently executed. , the game can be motivated to set a specific game state.

In addition, in this embodiment, a table (first winning random number table 202a) that is referenced when executing the big winning lottery and a table (small winning random number table 202b) that is referenced when executing the small winning lottery are provided. Although they are configured separately, they are not limited to this, and one table may be used to execute the big winning lottery and the small winning lottery. In this case, for example, the first winning random number table 202a may be configured so as to define the range of counter values for small winnings for each type of special symbol. By configuring in this way, the number of data tables that the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 has can be reduced.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained, the type of the special symbol, and the state of the special symbol, the jackpot according to the predetermined determination value Although it is configured to execute the determination of winning or small winning, it is not limited to this, for example, according to the number of winning big wins or the number of small winnings within a specific period until a predetermined condition is established, The value of the first winning random number counter C1 specified for winning the big win or winning the small win may be varied, or the big win lottery and the small win are executed in a state where a predetermined abnormal condition is established. A data table that does not define a judgment value corresponding to a big win or a judgment value corresponding to a small win may be provided as a data table for abnormal times referred to in the lottery.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to simultaneously (parallelly) execute the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol. is set so as not to win a jackpot at the same time (in parallel) (so that a jackpot game is not executed). In the pachinko machine 10 having such restrictions, for example, a lottery of one special pattern is won, and during the period until the jackpot game corresponding to the winning of the jackpot is executed, a lottery of the other special pattern is executed. A lottery for a special pattern is executed by referring to a dedicated data table in which only the judgment value corresponding to the small prize is prescribed without defining the judgment value corresponding to the big prize so as not to win the big prize. may be configured.

The first win type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol jackpot is won, and adds 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. It is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing.

The value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. In this embodiment, using the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2, the jackpot type is determined by referring to the jackpot type selection table 202d.

Here, details of the jackpot type selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 to 14. FIG. As described above, this jackpot type selection table 202d defines a random value for determining the jackpot type when the jackpot is won, using the value of the first hit type counter C2 obtained.

As shown in FIG. 12, the jackpot type selection table 202d includes a normal table 202d1 that determines the jackpot type in the normal state, and a variable/potential table 202d2 that determines the jackpot type in the variable probability state or the probability state. includes at least

First, referring to FIG. 13, it is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the normal table 202d1. The normal table 202d1 is a table referred to when the game state is the normal state. As shown in FIG. 13, in this normal table 202d1, the types of special symbols won in the jackpot (special figure 1, special figure 2) and the value of the acquired first winning type counter C2 are associated with each other. The jackpot types are stipulated.

Specifically, the symbol type of the special symbol is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and the value of the first per type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 70", "jackpot A" is defined. A "jackpot B" is defined in the range of "71 to 95", and a "jackpot C" is defined in the range of "96 to 99". Further, the symbol type of the special symbol is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), and the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined as "jackpot D" in the range of "0 to 99".

Here, the release operation during the jackpot game corresponding to each jackpot type will be described. In the present embodiment, the opening operation contents (round game contents) executed according to the jackpot type, that is, the plurality of movable members (the opening and closing door 650f1 of the right variable winning device 650, the left variable winning The ROM 202 of the main controller 110 preliminarily stores the operation contents (timing, number of times) of the opening/closing door 65f1 of the device 65 and the switching member 650h as an opening operation scenario defined in chronological order.

Then, when the jackpot is won, the opening operation scenario corresponding to the set jackpot type is read out and stored in a running scenario storage area (not shown) in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 . When the opening operation scenario is stored in the executing scenario storage area (not shown), the scenario contents are updated each time the main process (see FIG. 52) of main controller 110 is executed (every 4 milliseconds). In the jackpot control process (see S2404 in FIG. 55) for executing the control during the jackpot game, the current scenario content is determined, and the process based on the determination result is executed.

In this way, a plurality of movable members (the opening/closing door 650f1 of the right variable winning device 650, the opening/closing door 65f1 of the left variable winning device 65, and the switching member 650h) are moved during the jackpot game. By using an opening operation scenario defined in series, it is possible to centrally manage the operation control for a plurality of movable members. Therefore, for example, compared to the case where the motion control is executed separately for each movable member, the motion timing of each movable member can be appropriately set, and when a problem occurs in one movable member, other motion processing for the movable member can be executed smoothly.

"Jackpot A" is a jackpot game of round game 1 in which the number of rounds (the number of times the round game is executed) is two rounds as a jackpot game, and the first attacker (left variable winning device) 65 is opened during the two rounds. It is a jackpot type in which a game is executed. This round game 1 means that the first attacker (left variable winning device) 65 is continuously opened until 10 balls win or the opening period elapses for 30 seconds as one round game. It is a round game that allows

Also, when "jackpot A" is set as the jackpot type, the high probability state of the normal pattern is set after the jackpot game ends (the time saving flag 203m is set to ON), and the high probability state of the special pattern is set ( The variable probability flag 203g is set to ON). That is, after the big win game based on the "big win A" is executed, the variable probability state is set.

"Jack B" is a jackpot game with 16 rounds (the number of times the round game is executed), during which the second attacker (right variable winning device) 650 is opened, and a jackpot game is executed. .

In addition, when the jackpot game based on the "jackpot B" is executed, the normal pattern low probability state is set (the time reduction flag 203m is set to OFF) after the jackpot game ends, and the special pattern high probability state is set. (The variable probability flag 203g is set to ON). That is, after the big win game based on the "big win B" is executed, the potential state is set. During the latent certainty state, which will be described in detail later, the special figure 2 game is executed, and the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won is the most advantageous to the player. Therefore, after the end of the big win game, the "big win B" in which the latent state is set becomes a big win game more advantageous to the player than the "big win A".

"Jack C" is a round game 1 jackpot game in which the number of rounds (the number of times the round game is executed) is a round as a jackpot game, and the first attacker (left variable winning device) 65 is opened during two rounds. Is a jackpot type that is executed.

In addition, when the jackpot game based on the "jackpot C" is executed, the normal pattern low probability state is set (the time reduction flag 203m is set to OFF) after the jackpot game ends, and the special pattern high probability state is set. (The variable probability flag 203g is set to ON). That is, after the big win game based on the "big win C" is executed, the potential state is set. Therefore, compared to the "jackpot A", the game becomes a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player, and since the number of rounds is small, the game becomes a jackpot game that is disadvantageous to the player compared to the "jackpot B".

In other words, when a jackpot is won by lottery of the first special symbols and the normal state is set as the game state, the player wins a jackpot game ("jackpot A") with a probability of 71%, It is constructed so that the player wins a big winning game (“big winning B” or “big winning C”) disadvantageous to the player with a probability of 29%.

In the present embodiment, when a big win advantageous to the player is won by lottery of the first special symbols, a big win game is executed in which the first attacker (left variable winning device) 65 is opened for two rounds, and the game is played. When a jackpot advantageous to the player is won, a jackpot game is executed in which the second attacker (right variable prize winning device) 650 is opened for 16 rounds, so the type of jackpot won this time is advantageous. It is possible for the player to determine whether or not it is a good win during the jackpot game, but it is not limited to this. , the same winning device (for example, the first attacker (left variable winning device) 65) may be opened to perform a jackpot game.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from easily determining whether or not the type of the jackpot won this time is advantageous depending on the game contents of the jackpot game, so that the jackpot game can be played. It is possible to predict what the game state to be set after the end of the game is until immediately before the game state is set, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In this case, as opening operation scenarios set during the jackpot game, an opening operation scenario corresponding to a big win that is advantageous to the player and an opening operation scenario corresponding to a big win that is disadvantageous to the player are set for each winning device ( The operation control contents of the opening/closing doors (the opening/closing door 65f1 and the opening/closing door 650f1) are made the same so that the first attacker 65 and the second attacker 650) are in the open state and the closed state, and the jackpot advantageous to the player is dealt with. In the opening operation scenario, as the operation control content for the switching member 650h, the operation control content that makes it easier for the ball to pass through the specific area is defined. As the contents of operation control for , the contents of operation control that make it difficult for the sphere to pass through the specific area may be defined.

In addition, the operation control contents of the switching member 650h are made the same between the opening operation scenario corresponding to the big win that is advantageous to the player and the opening operation scenario corresponding to the big win that is disadvantageous to the player. Attacker 65, second attacker 650) may be configured to change the timing for controlling the operation of the opening and closing doors (opening and closing door 65f1, opening and closing door 650f1) so that it becomes an open state or a closed state. By varying the length of a waiting period (opening period) from the execution to the execution of the first round game, the execution timing of the round game and the operation timing of the switching member 650h are made different. Thus, a big winning game in which the ball easily passes through the specific area and a big winning game in which the ball hardly passes through the specific area may be executed.

Since the "jackpot D" is the same jackpot game as the above-described "jackpot B", the detailed description of the jackpot game contents is omitted, but the "jackpot D" is selected only by lottery of the second special symbols. This is different from the jackpot B in that it is the most advantageous jackpot game for the player because the latent definite state is set after the jackpot game of the "jackpot D" is finished.

As described above, in this embodiment, the game state to be set after the end of the jackpot game is set according to the type of the special symbol that has been won in the jackpot and the game state when the jackpot is won. Therefore, it is possible to make the player not only expect to win the jackpot and play the game, but also to make the player interested in the type of special symbols that win the jackpot and the game state at the time of winning. can.

In this embodiment, the number of types of jackpots is four, but the number of types is not limited to four, and may be three or less, or may be five or more. Moreover, even if the value of the first winning type counter C2 is the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, different jackpot types may be selected. By configuring in this way, for example, when a big win is made with the second special symbol, by setting a big win type in which a larger number of rounds are executed, the winning with the second special symbol can be made more appealing to the player. can be expected. Therefore, the win in the high probability game state can be made more advantageous to the player, and the amusement of the game in the high probability state can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to make the player strongly desire to shift to the high probability state, and to play the game for a longer period of time.

In addition, the types of jackpot types selected in the first special pattern and the second special pattern and the selection rate (distribution rate) of each jackpot type are made the same, and the first hit type counter C2 corresponding to each jackpot type is set. It may be configured so that only the range is different. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the fraudulent act of acquiring the value of the first winning type counter C2 aiming at a specific counter value in both the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Next, with reference to FIG. 14(a), the contents defined in the variable probability/potential probability table 202d2 will be described. FIG. 14(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variable probability/potential probability table 202d2. The probability variation/latency probability table 202d2 is a table referred to when the game state is the probability variation state or the probability probability state. As shown in FIG. 14(a), this probability variation/potential probability table 202d2 includes the types of special symbols won in the jackpot (special figure 1, special figure 2), and the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2. , A plurality of jackpot types are defined in association with each other.

The probability variation/latency table 202d2 differs from the normal table 202d1 in that the game state is referred to in the probability variation state or the latent probability state, and the symbol type of the special symbol is the first special symbol ( In the special figure 1), "jackpot A" is defined in the range of "0 to 59" for the value of the first hit type counter C2, and "jackpot B" is defined in the range of "60 to 84". ” is defined, and the difference is that “jackpot C” is defined in the range of “85 to 99”.

The small hit type counter C5 determines the small hit type and determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol hits, and has a predetermined range (eg, 0 to 99), it is incremented by 1 in order, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the small hit type counter C5, for example, is periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and the ball is the upper first ball entrance 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance 64b2. When the ball enters the ball, it is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203, and when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the ball is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 202b of the RAM 203. .

The value of the small hit type counter C5 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. Then, when the result of the lottery for the second special symbol is a small hit, the obtained value of the small hit type counter C5 and the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 are set in order to determine the type of the small hit to be executed. The type of small hit (small hit game content) is determined using the small hit type selection table 202g.

Here, with reference to FIG.14(b), the small hit classification selection table 202g is demonstrated. In this small hit type selection table 202g, two types of small hit types are defined based on the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5. Specifically, the value of the obtained small hit type counter is defined as "small hit A" in the range of "0 to 49", and "small hit B" in the range of "50 to 99". .

In this embodiment, as described above, it is configured so that a small hit is won only in the lottery of the second special symbol. Then, when a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special pattern, the fluctuation of the first special pattern which is fluctuating at the same time is temporarily stopped or forcibly stopped by the missing pattern according to the type of the small prize. is doing. Specifically, in the lottery of the second special symbol, when the small winning is won, if the small winning type is "small winning A", the first special symbol that is fluctuating at the same time is temporarily stopped and "small winning If the hit is "B", the game is forced to stop as a miss.

By configuring in this way, when executing the special figure 2 game during the latent certainty state, even if the first special symbol fluctuating at the same time is a fluctuation indicating a big hit, in the present embodiment In the lottery of 2 special patterns, it is constructed so as to win a small win with a probability of 1/2, so that the player is prevented from winning a disadvantageous big win by temporarily stopping or forcibly stopping with a missing pattern. be able to.

In addition, in the present embodiment, two types of small winning types are selected, but two types or less may be used, or three types or more may be used. By configuring in this way, for example, it is possible to provide a small winning type in which the fluctuation of the first special symbol does not stop, etc., to give the player a more exciting feeling, and to provide various game characteristics. can.

In addition, it is configured to win a small hit in both the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol, and a different small winning type (small winning game content), the small hit type selection table may be set so as to define a different small hit type (small hit game content) for each type of special symbol.

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). Rough display modes such as so-called short-time out, long-time out, normal reach, and super reach are determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1. Determination of the display mode is, specifically, determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode are determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. be. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 52), which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. A variation pattern selection table 202e (see FIG. 15) storing a random value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random value) of the variation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. It is

Here, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern selection table 202e. As shown in FIG. 15, the variation pattern selection table 202e includes a normal table 202e1 used when the normal state is set as the game state, and a probability variation table 202e2 used when the probability variation state is set. and a latency confirmation table 202e3 used when the latency status is set. Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, since the data table used for selecting the variation pattern is different according to the game state, the variation pattern (variation time) selected according to the game state is made different. be able to.

Next, detailed contents of each table defined in the variation pattern selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 and 17. FIG. FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the normal table 202e1. This normal table 202e1 is a data table that is referred to when the normal state is set as the gaming state, and the second special symbol for the variation time set for the lottery of the first special symbol. It is stipulated that the fluctuation time set for the lottery is longer.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 16, the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1), the lottery result is "jackpot (hit)", and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 50". In the range of "51 to 100", the range of "51 to 100" is defined in association with super reach A with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds, and "101 to 150". The range is defined in association with the super reach B per variation time of 30 seconds, and the range of "151 to 198" is defined in association with the super reach C per variation time of 30 seconds.

In addition, the lottery result is "out", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "0 to 50" with a short deviation of 8 seconds of variation time, and the variation time is defined in the range of "51 to 70". Is defined to correspond to a long deviation of 12 seconds, and is defined to correspond to a normal reach with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds in the range of "71 to 150", and a deviation of 30 seconds in the range of "151 to 170" A super reach A is defined in correspondence, and a deviation super reach B with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is defined in correspondence with the range of "171 to 198".

On the other hand, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special figure 2), the variation pattern of 10 minutes (600 seconds) without regard to the lottery result of the special symbol or the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1. (Long hit fluctuation, long small hit fluctuation, long off fluctuation) are set.

Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, when a right-handed game is executed in a state where the normal state is set as the game state, the ball is configured to be able to enter the second ball entrance 640. However, as described above, since a long time (10 minutes) is set as the variation time of the second special symbol during the normal state, the ball is entered into the upper first ball entrance 64b1 during the normal state. A game, that is, a game for executing a lottery for the first special symbol is performed.

In the present embodiment, the same variation pattern table is used regardless of the jackpot type won, but the jackpot type indicates a jackpot (for example, jackpot A) that is advantageous to the player without being limited to this. Different variation pattern tables may be used for the case of the jackpot type and the case of the jackpot type indicating another jackpot (jackpot B). In this case, for example, the variation pattern table used when winning a jackpot type indicating an advantageous jackpot (jackpot A) is shorter than the variation pattern table used when winning a jackpot type indicating other jackpots. It is preferable to configure so that the time variation pattern can be easily selected. As a result, the longer the variation time set in the variation pattern to be executed, the more advantageous the player can expect the game result, so that the player is interested in the variation time of the special symbol. be able to.

Further, the variation pattern table used when winning the jackpot type indicating the normal jackpot makes it easier to select a variation pattern with a longer variation time than the variation pattern table used when winning the jackpot type indicating the probability variable jackpot. In this way, when a jackpot is won in a short variation time, the player can be provided with an unexpected game result, even when a short variation time is selected. , can keep you hopeful until the end.

Next, the contents of the probability variation table 202e2 provided in the variation pattern selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. 18(a). FIG. 18(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the probability variation table 202e2. As shown in FIG. 18(a), the probability variation table 202e2 defines the symbol type, the lottery result, the value range of the variation type counter CS1, and the variation pattern in association with each other.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 18A, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery result is "hit (jackpot)", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is " In the range of "0 to 99", normal fluctuation is defined with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds, and in the range of "100 to 198", super fluctuation is defined with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds. In the case of "outside", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, the entire range is stipulated with an out-of-range variation with a variation time of 8 seconds.

On the other hand, if the symbol type is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the variation pattern with a variation time of 600 seconds (10 minutes) regardless of the special symbol lottery result or the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 (Hit variation, small hit variation, off variation) are defined.

As described above, during the variable probability state, a shorter variation time is set as the variation time of the second special symbol than during the normal state. Furthermore, it is configured such that it is not possible (difficult) to newly acquire the reserved memory of the second special symbol during the variable probability state. Therefore, once it shifts to the definite variable state, it is possible to digest the reserved memory of the second special symbol in a short period of time.

Also, the variation time (8 seconds, 10 seconds, 20 seconds) that can be set as the variation pattern of the first special symbol overlaps with the variation time that can be set as the variation pattern of the first special symbol in the normal state. By configuring and grasping the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, it may not be possible to easily determine whether the current game state is the normal state or the probability variable state. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured such that a variable time is set so that the player can determine which game state is set.

Next, the contents of the probability table 202e3 provided in the variation pattern selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. 17(b). FIG. 17(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the latency confirmation table 202e3. As shown in FIG. 17(b), in the probability table 202e3, the symbol type, the lottery result, the value range of the variation type counter CS1, and the variation pattern are defined in association with each other.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 17(b), when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), regardless of the special symbol lottery result or the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 , Variation time 10 minutes variation pattern (per long variation, off long variation) is defined, if the design type is the second special design (special design 2), the lottery result of the special design, the acquired variation type Regardless of the value of the counter CS1, a variation pattern with a variation time of 1 second (hit-short variation, small-hit short variation, off-short variation) is defined.

Thus, during the latent definite state, unlike other game states, the variation time corresponding to the lottery of the second special symbol is set shorter than the variation time corresponding to the lottery of the first special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to make a game state (that is, a special figure 2 game) in which the lottery of the second special symbol is more likely to be executed than the lottery of the first special symbol.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as described above, when a big win or a small win is won by the change of the second special symbol, the change of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped or forcibly stopped. In this way, during the latent certainty state, the first special symbol is composed of only the variation pattern of 10 minutes, and the variation of the second special symbol is composed only of the variation pattern of 1 second, so that the variation of the first special symbol is almost certain. can be forcibly stopped to prevent the player from winning a jackpot disadvantageous to the player.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as described above, the first special symbol is configured to be only a 10-minute variation pattern, but a shorter variation pattern (for example, 30 seconds, etc.) may be configured to be executed. . By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with various game properties, such as whether or not the player can be prevented from winning a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player in the special figure 2 game.

Returning to FIG. 9, the description continues. The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 232, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 232). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28), and it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal start opening (through gate) 67. It is acquired at the same time and stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM203.

Then, the value of the random number that is the winning of the normal symbol is set by the second winning random number table 202c stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is the value of the second winning random number table 202c. If it matches the value of the random number that is set as a hit, it is determined as a hit of the normal design (second design). In addition, this second winning random number table 202c is divided into two types, one for when the probability is low for normal symbols and one for when probability of winning is higher for normal symbols than when the probability is low, and included in each. The number of random numbers to be a jackpot is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be winning different, the probability of winning is changed between when the probability of normal symbols is low and when the probability of normal symbols is high.

The contents defined in the second winning random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. 11(c). FIG. 11(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the second winning random number table 202c. As shown in FIG. 11(c), in the case of the low-probability state of the normal design, the second hit random number counter C4 acquired is defined in the range of "0 to 10" for the normal design, and the high probability of the normal design. In the case of the state, the acquired second random number counter C4 is defined as a normal figure in the range of "0 to 231".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 232), and is updated once per timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 28). In addition, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 52).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 controls the big winning lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device 83 can be executed.

Normal figure fluctuation type counter CS2 is, for example, incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The value of this general/universal figure fluctuation type counter CS2 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 52) described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process. Then, the normal pattern fluctuation time is determined by the value of the normal pattern fluctuation type counter CS2. Specifically, using the value of the acquired normal pattern fluctuation type counter CS2, the normal pattern fluctuation time is determined with reference to the normal pattern fluctuation pattern table 202f provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 It is configured as follows.

Next, with reference to FIG. 18, the contents defined in the normal pattern fluctuation pattern table 202f will be described. FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the normal pattern fluctuation pattern table 202f. As shown in FIG. 18, when the low probability state of the normal pattern is set, the value of the acquired normal pattern fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 198" 30 seconds fluctuation time is set be done. Then, when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set and the value of the acquired normal pattern fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 198", the fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is set. is doing.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the normal symbol variation time is configured to vary based on the normal symbol game state and the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2, and is set. It is configured to vary the ease with which a ball can enter the lower first ball entrance 64b2 depending on the variation time. As a result, in each game state, it is possible to restrict the lottery action of the second special pattern, which tends to obtain a lottery result advantageous to the player, so that the player is prevented from receiving excessive benefits. can be done.

Returning to FIG. 4, the description is continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 4, the RAM 203 includes a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 52) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (see FIG. 51) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 50) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 19, the RAM 203 has a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, Second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, probability variation flag 203g, probability variation number counter 203h, special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203i, special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203j, game state storage area 203k, time saving It has a flag 203m, a big hit flag 203n, a special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o, a small hit flag 203p, a special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r, a special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s, and a memory area 203z.

In the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, up to the upper limit number (4 in this embodiment), the ball enters the upper first ball entrance 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance 64b2 (start winning) This is a storage area for storing various counter values obtained based on what has been done. In addition, the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is acquired based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 (start winning) up to the upper limit number (4 in this embodiment). This is a storage area for storing various counter values set.

The first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is a storage area for storing various counter values for starting the variable display of the first special symbol. When various counter values are stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, this is a storage area in which the various counter values are shifted and stored. The second special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is a storage area in which various counter values for starting the variable display of the second special symbol are stored. not shown).

The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the first special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown), and the second special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) are started. Each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the variation type counter CS1, and the small winning type counter C5 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 9) along with the detection of winning is stored. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has entered the upper first ball entrance 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance 64b2 (start winning) during timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 28), The values of the respective counters C1 to C2, C5 and CS1 are obtained from the counter buffer and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. On the other hand, when it is detected that the ball has entered the second ball entrance 640 (start winning), similarly to the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, each counter C1 to C2, C5, CS1 from the counter buffer A value is obtained and stored in each corresponding area (not shown) respectively as well.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the special symbol variation (lottery), the big winning lottery and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81 are executed. Among the data corresponding to each start winning stored in the above-described first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (values of counters C1 to C2, C5, CS1), one The data corresponding to the start winning prize is shifted to this special symbol holding ball execution area. It should be noted that the shift in this embodiment means moving data stored in one area to another area.

The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c includes a second winning random number counter C4 and a normal symbol variation type counter CS2 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 9) upon detection of the ball passing through the through gate 67 (start winning). A storage area in which values are stored. When the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 detects that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (started winning) in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 28), the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is detected from the counter buffer. , Acquire the value of the normal pattern fluctuation type counter CS2, and store it in the normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203c. The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c has four reserved areas so that data (values of counters C4 and CS2) corresponding to one start winning can be stored (reserved) up to four times. In the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, the data of the reserved balls are stored in the order of passing through the through gate 67 (start winning) in order from the reserved area in which the order of digestion is early among the reserved areas in which the data is vacant. .

In addition, when the normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) detects that it is the execution start timing of the variable display effect of the normal symbol based on the start winning, each counter value is stored, and the normal symbol winning lottery Also, it is a memory for storing data (values of counters C4 and CS2) to be referred to in processing such as setting of display (variation pattern) of the first pattern display device 37 or the third pattern display device 81.

In addition, when the MPU 201 detects that it is the timing to start executing the variable display effect of the normal symbols, the above-described normal symbol reservation is performed in order to execute the processing such as the winning lottery and the setting of the display of the second symbol display device 83. Of the data corresponding to each starting prize stored in the ball storage area 203c (the value of the second winning random number counter C4, the value of the normal figure fluctuation type counter CS2), the data corresponding to one starting prize is Shift to a symbol holding ball execution area (not shown). It should be noted that the shift in this embodiment means moving data stored in one area to another area.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e are detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28) periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. Based on the winning to the entrance 64b1, the lower first entrance 64b2, or the second entrance 640, the variable display effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 (the variation performed by the third symbol display device 81 It is a counter that counts the number of held balls (number of standby times) of display effect) up to a maximum of 4 times. The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e are set to zero as initial values by the initial setting processing of the RAM 203 after power-on (see S2301 in FIG. 51). Then, each time the starting winning prize is detected and the number of held balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203b are decremented by one each time the variable display effect is executed.

Also, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (that is, the number of reserved balls) is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning). When the counter value is stored in the area 203a, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the first special symbol reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110. FIG. The first special symbol reserved ball number command is a command sent from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 each time the starting winning is detected and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is incremented by one. is.

Also, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (that is, the number of reserved balls) is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 (start winning). When the counter value is stored in the area 203b, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the second special symbol reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110. FIG. The second special symbol reserved ball number command is a command sent from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 each time the start winning is detected and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is incremented by 1. is.

The MPU 201 stores the values of the counters C1 to C2, C5 and CS1 obtained from the counter buffer in the first special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) or the second special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown). are respectively stored, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) or the second special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) are transferred to the first special symbol variation start process. (See S210 in FIG. 30) or refer to in the second special symbol variation start process (S212 in FIG. 36), perform a jackpot lottery based on the reference data, and determine the variation pattern and stop type corresponding to the lottery result do. In the first symbol display device 37, under the control of the main controller 110, variation display is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type.

In addition, the variation pattern and the stop type determined here are notified to the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the first or special figure 2 variation pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variable display effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f detects a ball passing through a through gate 67 during timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 28) which is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds (hereinafter referred to as "start winning"). ), it is a counter that counts up to four times the number of pending balls (number of standby times) of the variable display performed by the second symbol display device 83 . This normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is a counter that stores the total number of reserved balls stored based on the ball passing through the through gate 67 . Zero is set as the initial value by the initial setting processing of the RAM 203 after power-on (see S2301 in FIG. 51). Then, every time the start winning prize is detected and the number of held balls displayed in a variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4 (see S2106 in FIG. 49). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of normal symbols is executed (see FIG. 48, S2005).

The variable probability flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the current gaming state is a high probability state (variable probability state or latent probability state) of special symbols. When the variable probability flag 203g is set to ON, it indicates that the game state is in a high probability state (variable probability state or latent probability state) of special symbols, and when it is OFF, it is a low probability state (normal state) of special symbols. indicates that there is In this embodiment, the variable probability flag 203g is set to ON at the end of the jackpot game (see S2706 and S2708 in FIG. 55). On the other hand, it is set to OFF when a jackpot game is started (see S813 in FIG. 34 and S1510 in FIG. 42). In the initialized state, it is set to OFF, and when a normal power failure occurs, the state immediately before the power failure is backed up.

The probability variation number counter 203h is a counter for counting the number of big wins after the big win game. In this embodiment, when the number of big wins reaches three times, the normal state is set after the third big win game is completed, regardless of which jackpot type is won. This probability variable number counter 203h is incremented until the value reaches the upper limit value of 2 after the jackpot game ends (S2704 in FIG. 55), and is reset to 0 when the upper limit value reaches 2 (FIG. 55). S2703). It should be noted that this probability variation number counter 203h is backed up when the power is turned off. It is set to 0 in the initialized state.

In this embodiment, the value of the probability variable number counter is added at the end of the big hit, but it may be added at the start of the big hit game. Also, although the upper limit is set to 2, it is not limited to this, and may be set to 2 or less or 3 or more. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a variety of playability.

Special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203i is a flag indicating a period to stop updating (subtracting) the fluctuation time of special figure 1, and stops updating (subtraction) of the fluctuation time when it is set to ON, When the ON state is changed to OFF, the stopped update (subtraction) of the variable time is restarted.

This special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203i is set to ON when stopping the variation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) when the lottery result is a small hit A (S1604 in FIG. 43), special symbol It is referred to in the variation process (see FIG. 29) (S202 in FIG. 29). When it is set to ON in the process of S202, the process of updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the first special symbol (special symbol 1) in the same manner as during fluctuation is executed (Fig. 29 S203). That is, while the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203i is set to ON, the update (subtraction) of the variable time is stopped, but the first symbol display device is in a state where the variable display is continuously executed. Become. Thereby, it is possible to notify that the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is not forcibly stopped by setting the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203i to ON. Then, when it is determined that it is set to ON in the first special symbol variation executing process (see FIG. 33) (S701 in FIG. 33: Yes), it is set to OFF (S703 in FIG. 33).

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of one of the special symbols is a jackpot, based on the fact that one special symbol has stopped in a combination that indicates a jackpot according to the jackpot type (jackpot game (based on execution), the process of forcibly stopping the fluctuation display of the other special symbol and the fluctuation display of the other special symbol are temporarily stopped. In addition, when the lottery result of one of the special symbols is a small hit, the fluctuation display of the other special symbol is temporarily stopped (small winning game is stopped until is completed), or it is configured to stop when it is out.

That is, according to the lottery result of one special symbol, the variable display of the other special symbol can be processed in various modes. By configuring in this way, the lottery result of one of the special symbols becomes the most advantageous game result (for example, a big win) for the player, and while the variable display for showing the game result is being executed, the other (lottery result is a small win) is stop-displayed and the big win is erased by the small win.

Special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203j is a flag indicating a period to stop the update (subtraction) of the variation time of special figure 2, and stops the update (subtraction) of the variation time when it is set to ON, When the ON state is changed to OFF, the stopped update (subtraction) of the variable time is restarted.

This special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203j is set to ON when stopping the variation of the first special symbol (special figure 1) when the lottery result is a big hit B (S832 in FIG. 35), special symbol variation It is referred to in the processing (see FIG. 29) (S204 in FIG. 29). If it is set to ON in the process of S204, the process of updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the first special symbol (special symbol 1) in the same manner as during fluctuation is executed (Fig. 29 of S205). That is, while the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203j is set to ON, the update (subtraction) of the variable time is stopped, but the first symbol display device is in a state where the variable display is continuously executed. Become. Thereby, it is possible to notify that the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is not forcibly stopped by the fact that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203j is set to ON. Then, when it is determined that it is set to ON in the second special symbol variation in-execution process (see FIG. 41) (S1401 in FIG. 41: Yes), it is set to OFF (S1403 in FIG. 41).

The game state storage area 203k is a storage area for temporarily storing the currently set game state, and the game state set after the end of the jackpot game (probability variation flag 203g and time saving flag 203m setting status) The game state corresponding to is stored. Specifically, when the probability variable flag 203g is set to off and the time saving flag 203m is set to off, the normal state is stored, and when the probability variable flag 203g is set to ON and the time saving flag 203m is set to ON, the probability changing state is set. When the variable probability flag 203g is set to ON and the time saving flag 203m is set to OFF, the probability state is stored.

Furthermore, in the state where the jackpot game or the small hit game is being executed, the winning game state (big hit state, small hit state) indicating that each winning game is being executed, and the jackpot game being executed The type information indicating the jackpot type corresponding to is also stored.

A state command is set based on the information stored (memorized) in the game state storage area 203k, and the state command is output to the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. The sound lamp control device 113 receives the output state command and temporarily stores it in the sub-state setting area 223k.

The information stored in the game state storage area 203k is configured to be able to hold the information even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and the information is executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. In the start-up process (see FIG. 51), the state command corresponding to the information stored in the game state storage area 203k is set.

As a result, even when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, the current game state can be determined by the sound lamp control device 113 side.

The time saving flag 203m is a flag for indicating the state in which the high probability state of the normal design is set, and is set to ON when the high probability state of the normal design is set. This time saving flag 203m is set to ON corresponding to the winning jackpot type after the jackpot game ends (S2706 in FIG. 55). And it is set to OFF when winning the jackpot game. As a result, since the high probability state of normal symbols is not set during the jackpot game, it is possible to suppress giving excessive benefits to the player during the jackpot game.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the high probability state of the normal design is set, at least, until the next big hit is won, the high probability state of the normal design is configured to continue. Without being limited to the configuration, for example, when an end condition that can be satisfied depending on the processing contents of various processes executed by the main control device 110 is satisfied, the high probability state of the normal symbol may be configured to end. Specifically, when the lottery result of each symbol lottery executed in a state where the high probability state of normal symbols is set becomes a predetermined lottery result (for example, small hit winning), or a predetermined lottery result (For example, a small hit) When the number of times of reaching a predetermined number (for example, 2 times), it may be configured to end the high probability state of the normal symbol, and the number of times of lottery of each symbol lottery When reaching a predetermined number of times (for example, 30 times), the high probability state of normal symbols may be terminated.

In this case, it is preferable to change the end condition described above according to the jackpot type won and the gaming state at the time of winning. Thereby, when the high probability state of the normal design is set, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict how long the high probability state of the normal design will continue.

The jackpot flag 203n is based on the ball entering the upper first ball entrance 64b1, the lower first ball entrance 64b2, or the second ball entrance 640, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired is This is a flag that is set to ON when it is determined to be a jackpot at the start of fluctuation. Also, when the jackpot game ends, it is set to OFF. In addition, it is composed of a flag capable of identifying which of the first special symbol and the second special symbol the jackpot corresponds to. Concretely, it consists of 2 bits, the jackpot flag 203n is set to ON for the first special symbol with "10", and the jackpot flag 203n is set to ON for the second special symbol at "01", At "00", the jackpot flag 203n is set to be off.

Here, since the jackpot flag 203n is configured to distinguish between the jackpot winning of the first special symbol and the jackpot winning of the second special symbol and distinguishable, at the start of the special symbol variation, the first special symbol and the When one of the second special symbols is set to ON first, even if the other lottery results in a big win, the big win flag 203n corresponding to the big win of each special pattern is set to ON. .

Although detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol are configured to be executable at the same time (in parallel), and both special symbols will be a big hit. In the case of winning, a jackpot game is executed based on the lottery result of the special symbol on the side where the special symbol variation is stopped first (the special symbol is confirmed and displayed), and the special symbol variation is stopped first (the special symbol is confirmed and displayed). ), depending on the jackpot type, the other special symbol variation is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that the lottery result is out.

By constructing in this way, in the pachinko machine 10 capable of simultaneously (parallelly) executing lotteries for a plurality of special symbol types, a jackpot is won in each special symbol lottery, and an excessive amount is given to the player at the same time. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a privilege (jackpot game) is granted.

Furthermore, even if one special symbol lottery wins a big win that is disadvantageous to the player, the other special symbol lottery wins a big win that is advantageous to the player before the winning result is stopped and displayed (confirmed display). It is possible to elect. In this case, it is preferable to execute a variable performance suggesting that the player has won a disadvantageous win by using the variable time until the special symbol lottery result is stopped and displayed. As a result, the player can be made to think that he/she has won the lottery at a disadvantage, so that the other special symbol lottery can be executed willingly during the fluctuation time.

In addition, it may be configured such that a shorter variation time is more likely to be set when winning a jackpot that is advantageous to the player than when winning a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player. As a result, it is possible to win an advantageous win in the other special symbol lottery while one of the special symbols won in a disadvantageous win fluctuates, and to stop display (fixed display) the winning result before the winning result in the disadvantageous win. can.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot flag 203n capable of separately storing the lottery result of the first special symbol (hitting election) and the lottery result of the second special symbol (hitting election) is used, but it is limited to this. Instead, a common jackpot flag is provided for the first special pattern and the second special pattern, and when one of the lottery for the first special pattern and the lottery for the second special pattern wins the jackpot, the jackpot flag 203n is turned on. , and in the other special symbol lottery executed with the big win flag 203n set to ON, the big win may not be won.

The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is a flag indicating that the jackpot A or the jackpot C of the first special pattern is executed while the second special pattern is fluctuating display, and the fluctuation display of the second special pattern. Inside, it is set to ON when the jackpot of the first special symbol is executed. This special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is set to ON in S805 of the 1st special design fluctuation stop processing (refer to S209 of Drawing 34) which MPU201 of main control unit 110 performs. Also, in the processing of S902 of the second special symbol variation start processing (see S212 in FIG. 36), it is set to OFF.

As a result, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special pattern and the jackpot pattern is stop-displayed, the second special pattern forcibly stop-displayed as a lost pattern is prevented from executing the lottery again. be able to.

In addition, in the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, within one special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 33), after executing the process relating to the first special symbol, the process relating to the second special symbol is executed. By configuring to execute, it is configured to execute the variation process for each special symbol without delay.

Then, in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 33), when any special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a big win, the main process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 52) is the big win control process. (S2404 in FIG. 53) is executed. In addition, the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 29), when the current state is the big hit state or the small hit state (S201 in FIG. 29: Yes), the special symbol variation process (S204 to S213 in FIG. 29) is configured to skip

That is, in the present embodiment, while the big winning game or the small winning game is being executed based on the special symbol lottery result, it is configured so that the new special symbol variation (lottery) is not executed, When the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode for indicating that the lottery result is a big win by the variation process for the first special symbol executed first in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 29). In addition, a new variation process for the second special symbol is performed within the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 29).

In this embodiment configured in this way, by using the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode for indicating that the lottery result is a big hit, that It is possible to suppress execution of a new variation process for the second special symbol within the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 29).

The small hit flag 203p is a flag indicating that the result of the determination of whether or not the second special symbol is a small hit, and is set to ON when a small hit is won. This small hit flag 203p is set to ON when the second special symbol win/loss determination result is a small hit (see S1102 in FIG. 38), and when the special symbol variation in which the winning result is a small hit is stopped and displayed. is set to off (see S1608 in FIG. 43).

The special figure 1 variation time counter 203r is a counter for measuring the variation time of the first special symbol, and corresponds to the variation pattern selected in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 32). A value indicating the fluctuation time is set (see S511 in FIG. 32). Then, the value is updated (subtracted) every time the first special symbol variation in-execution process (see S207 in FIG. 33) is executed, and whether the value is 0 in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 29) is determined (see S208 in FIG. 29). Here, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203r is 0 (S208 in FIG. 29: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop processing ( (see S209 in FIG. 34) is executed.

Furthermore, the value of this special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is cleared to 0 when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a big hit (see S1653 in FIG. 44). As a result, when the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a failure at the time of the second special symbol jackpot stop display, the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r remains, and the second special symbol is forcibly stopped. After the stop display, it is possible to suppress the restart of the fluctuation of the first special symbol again based on the value left in the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s.

The special figure 2 variation time counter 203s is a counter for measuring the variation time of the second special symbol, and corresponds to the variation pattern selected in the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S906 in FIG. 39). A value indicating the fluctuation time is set (see S1210 in FIG. 39). Then, the value is updated (subtracted) every time the second special symbol variation in-execution process (see S213 in FIG. 41) is executed, and whether the value is 0 in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 29) is determined (see S212 in FIG. 29). Here, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 variation time counter 203s is 0 (S212 in FIG. 29: Yes), the second special symbol variation stop processing ( (see S213 in FIG. 42) is executed.

Furthermore, the value of this special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is cleared to 0 when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a big hit (see S808 in FIG. 34). As a result, when the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a failure at the time of the jackpot stop display of the first special symbol, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s remains, and the second special symbol is forcibly stopped. After the stop display, it is possible to suppress the resumption of the variation of the second special symbol based on the value left in the special figure 2 variation time counter 203s.

The other memory area 203z is set (stored) with other data necessary for the game, counters, flags, and the like.

Returning to FIG. 4, the description continues. An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol reservation lamp 84, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate 65b of the specific winning opening 65a. A large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side as a shaft, a V opening solenoid for opening and closing the opening and closing door 650f1 of the right variable winning device 650, and a switching member 650h provided in the right variable winning device 650 A solenoid 209 consisting of a flow path solenoid 650k for driving a flow path solenoid 650k and a solenoid (other solenoid 209z) for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 supplies various commands and controls to these through the input/output port 205. Send a signal.

The input/output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253, various processes are executed.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 50) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues a ball shooting instruction. The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the operating handle is activated under the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effects. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main controller 110, the display controller 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like.

The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, It controls the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 and instructs the display control device 114 so as to change the contents of the presentation. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 .

The audio lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the error type. Send to device 114 . The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

The ROM 222 of the sound ramp control device 113 stores at least a variation pattern selection table 222a and a restart variation pattern selection table 222b, as shown in FIG. 20(a).

In the variation pattern selection table 222a, a variation pattern of each variation pattern type (out of range, out of reach, various types of reach, etc.) is set to a counter value for selecting a variation pattern (not shown). The sound ramp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110, the result of the suitability determination, and the acquired counter value for selection. This allows the audio ramp control device 113 to select a wide variety of variation modes while strictly observing rough information such as the variation time and the type of variation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode from being displayed frequently, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early.

The restart variation pattern selection table 222b selects "remaining time A", "remaining time B" and "remaining time C" from the remaining time information storage area from the remaining time when a command indicating the resumption of the temporarily stopped special symbol is received. A detailed restart variation pattern is selected based on the stored remaining time. As a result, by reselecting the restart variation pattern as the temporarily suspended variation pattern, it is possible to provide a more comfortable game.

Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 20(b). As shown in FIG. 20(b), the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 includes a command storage area 223a, a winning information storage area 223b, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, and a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d. , Special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e, Special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f, Special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g, Special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i, Right hitting flag 223j, Sub state setting area 223k, Special figure 1 provisional At least a stop flag 223m, a special figure 2 temporary stop flag 223n, a remaining time information storage area 223p, and another memory area 223z are provided.

The command storage area 223a is an area in which various commands output from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until the commands are processed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 59) of the sound ramp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a is read out and is read by the command determination processing. , the command is parsed and an action is taken according to the command.

The winning information storage area 223b has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area) for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively. , win-win information is stored. Based on the information stored in the prize winning information storage area 223b, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the lottery result of the reserved ball and the like before the change starts.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, like the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, is a variable effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81) ( It is a variable display), and is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (number of standby times) of the variable effect suspended in the main controller 110 up to four times. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from main controller 110 .

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110 and cannot acquire the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, and manages the number of reserved balls by the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. It's like

Specifically, in the main control unit 110, when the number of held balls in the variable display is added by the ball entering the upper first ball entrance 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance 64b2, or the main controller 110 In 110, when the variable display in the special symbol is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or after subtraction is output to the voice lamp control device. 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 is obtained from the reserved ball number command. , is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. Thus, in the voice lamp control device 113, according to the reservation ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, since the value of the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 223c is updated, the first special symbol of the main control device 110 The value can be updated while synchronizing with the reserved ball number counter 203d.

The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is used to display the reserved ball number symbols in the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, and stores the first special symbol reserved after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the number of balls counter 223c, a command for the number of reserved balls for display is transmitted to the display control device 114. FIG.

When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the audio lamp control device 113 is reserved. Image drawing is controlled so that the number of balls is displayed in the small area Dm1a of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 6(a)). As described above, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is changed while synchronizing with the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of pending ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the first special symbol pending ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variable display is held.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the game state becomes the latent state, when this display reserved ball number command is received, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number is displayed in the small display areas Dm4a to Dm4e. Control is performed so that the display is lit up accordingly. By configuring in this way, the value of the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol in the latent certainty state can be conveyed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d, for the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol based on the reserved ball number command output from the main controller 110 The only difference is that they are stored in the same manner, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The special figure 1 variation start flag 223e is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when a special figure 1 variation pattern command for notifying the variation pattern of the first special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received. is set to On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 .

The special figure 2 variation start flag 223f is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when the special figure 2 variation pattern command for notifying the variation pattern of the second special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received. is set to On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 .

The special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g is set to ON when the first stop type command for notifying the fluctuation stop type of the first special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 .

The special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to ON when the second stop type command for notifying the variation stop type of the second special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 .

The right hitting flag 223j is set to ON when the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is 1 or more when a jackpot ending command is received. On the other hand, it is set to OFF when the pending ball count command is received during the latency state and the value is determined to be 0.

Data corresponding to a state command output from main controller 110 is set in sub-state setting area 223k. The current game state can also be determined by the sound lamp control device 113 based on the data set in the sub-state setting area 223k. The state setting command is also output from the main control unit 110 when the power is turned on, and the game state backed up can be determined by the sound lamp control unit 113 .

The special figure 1 temporary stop flag 223m is a flag indicating whether the variation of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped, and is set to ON when the special figure 1 temporary stop command is received, and the special figure 1 restart command Set to off if received.

The special figure 2 temporary stop flag 223n is a flag indicating whether the variation of the second special symbol is temporarily stopped, and is set to ON when the special figure 2 temporary stop command is received, and the special figure 2 restart command Set to off if received.

The remaining time information storage area 223p is a storage area for storing information indicating the remaining time of the variation of the special symbols to be temporarily stopped. In the remaining time information storage area 223p, remaining period information (period A to period C) for indicating the remaining variation time of the temporarily stopped special symbol variation display is set, and the temporarily stopped special symbol variation display is performed. The stored remaining period information is referred to when setting the resuming effect in the case of resuming.

The dash end flag 223q is a flag for indicating that the number of retained balls of the first special symbol remaining when the latent state is set becomes 0 and the dash mode is terminated, and the first special symbol is retained. It is set to ON when the number-of-balls command is a command indicating 0. On the other hand, it is set to OFF when the change confirmation command is received.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 performs variable display (variation production) and advance notice production are controlled. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 4). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 50).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 4) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 27. FIG. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the sound lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238 , and the MPU 231 , work RAM 233 , character ROM 234 and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240 . . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237 , and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241 . A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239 .

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are different. Since there are models with exactly the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce costs.

The MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described below.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio ramp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110 . The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is designed so that a system reset is applied from the power supply 115 immediately after power is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same shall apply hereinafter). is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231 . Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer indicated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional game machine. The image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, NAND-type flash memories generally have a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data continuously arranged in a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed. It takes a long time before the data is output. Also, when reading discontinuous data, a long time is required each time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions that make up the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. store. The MPU 231 then executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233 . The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third pattern display device 81 , and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240 . The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235, which is connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236 .

The character ROM 234 is constructed by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storage and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Here, the NAND type flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can. Therefore, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to increase the interest of the player.

In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this way, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since the characters can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data is retrieved from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 .

Here, the NAND type flash memory 234a, due to its nature, generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks into which data cannot be written. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b applies known error correction to the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and avoids bad data blocks when reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a. data address translation.

The ROM controller 234b corrects errors in the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a that contains error bits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data blocks of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data blocks. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data corresponding to the designated address. is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 after performing known error correction processing.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one page of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b, for example, outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while data is set in one bank, or outputs the data specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The processing of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 234, and is intended to complement the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Of the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR-type ROM 234d stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND-type flash memory 234a. At least a first program storage area 234d1 is provided for storing a portion of the boot program to be executed.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third pattern display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after releasing the system reset. As a result, the display control device 114 can be put into a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 stores the boot program within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a), which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word=2 bytes)) are stored. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and instructs the bus line 240 to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 .

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and transfers the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. to specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, selects the program previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d. , the instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231 .

Here, in this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time to read the data of the first page after the address is specified until the data is output. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set the data in the buffer RAM 234c. You spend a lot of time waiting to receive your code. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Thus, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. , and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. , fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program are stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. The MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c that is stored, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is transferred to the program storage area 233a. The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, it is unnecessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the command pointer 231a to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to be set to a first predetermined address. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined number in the program storage area 233a. Set to a street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processing can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processes. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and process the instructions.

Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1. The instruction pointer 231a is programmed so as to include the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as a first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Execute the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control programs are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 73) executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 73) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to .

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third pattern display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 27) sent from the MPU 231 to be described later, and stores the frame in either a first frame buffer 236b or a second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third pattern display device 81 to display the image on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加. The image controller 237 performs the one-frame image drawing process and the one-frame image display process within the one-frame image display time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81 . parallel processing in

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 75(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third pattern display device 81 to display the image developed by the previous drawing.

In this manner, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Image drawing is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 . That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, in general, a NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of a ROM, but has a slower read speed than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image is drawn by the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing the image. , the time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after display is determined by main controller 110 or display controller 114 are permanently resident in resident video RAM 235. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, before the drawing is performed, the display controller 114 stores necessary data for drawing from the character ROM 234 in the normal video RAM 236. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal-use video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of , and the time required for reading the data can be saved, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. FIG. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given to the image controller 237 by the MPU 231 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the head address (storage source head address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and top of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains an address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address in the character ROM 234 according to various information of this transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 is not in use. , is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 . Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address to the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction are transferred.

As a result, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 in a short time. can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by transferring the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third pattern display device 81 from being too late.

In addition, since image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are used for image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine the period during which the display processing on the device 81 is not used, and to simplify the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 can be retained while the power is turned on without being overwritten. 235e and an error message image area 235f are provided, and at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third pattern area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is the power-on main image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 after power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on variable image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the upper first ball entrance 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance 64b1 is opened. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variable image that displays the lottery result performed by the main controller 110 in a variable effect when a ball is detected to have entered the ball entrance 64b2.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 73).

Here, the power-on variation image will be described with reference to FIG. 22 . FIG. 22 shows a power-on image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 immediately after the display control device 114 is powered on. It is an explanatory view explaining a time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to perform the power-on main image shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

At this time, when receiving the display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main controller 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114 displays FIG. As shown in FIG. 22(c), on the display screen of the main image when the power is turned on, there is a power-on variation image with a "○" pattern at the lower right position of the screen, and a "○" as shown in FIG. 22(c). A power-on fluctuation image of an "x" pattern is alternately and repeatedly displayed at the same position as the pattern during the fluctuation period. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the lottery performed by the main controller 110 is selected from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113. Judging the result, if it is a "special symbol big hit", the image shown in FIG. The image shown is displayed for a certain period of time after the stop of the variable effect.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person involved in the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the remaining image to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is displayed. To wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.例文帳に追加can be done.

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

Also, when the power is turned on, the player starts the game while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the entry of a ball into the upper first ball entrance 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance 64b2 is detected. 22B and 22C, the power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b. are alternately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 . As a result, a simple variation effect can be performed using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. While the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, when a ball is detected in the upper first ball entrance 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance 64b2, the corresponding variation effect is displayed in the third The pattern display device 81 can be made to display immediately.

Returning to FIG. 21, the description is continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. Here, with reference to FIG. 23, the rear image and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c among the rear images will be described. 23A and 23B are explanatory diagrams for explaining four kinds of back images and the range of the back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. FIG. 23(b) shows the back faces B to D corresponding to the "forest stage," "river stage," and "empty stage," respectively, with respect to back face A corresponding to "town stage." . Also, FIG. 24 shows the back surface E corresponding to the "island stage".

As shown in FIG. 23, the character ROM 234 prepares back images corresponding to the respective back images A to D, which are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . The image controller 237 draws the image so that the rear image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared for each back surface A to D (hereinafter referred to as "scrolling images") are configured such that the back images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between position c and position d and the image between position a and position a' are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the display area, and then the third pattern display device 81 displays an image between the position a and the position a' as the display area. The background image is scrolled in a continuous manner.

When it is determined to change the back surface type based on the back surface type selection table (not shown) and the stage is changed to "town stage", "forest stage", "river stage", or "sky stage", the MPU 231 , the image controller 237 is controlled so that the initial position of the display area is set between the position a and the position a' of the corresponding rear image, and the image at the initial position is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. . Then, as time elapses, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third pattern display device 81. When the area reaches the image between position c and position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as an image from position a to position a'. Therefore, the third pattern display device 81 can display the images between the position a to the position c by scrolling repeatedly in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 24, the rear image on the rear surface E shows the third pattern in the order of (a)→(b)→(c)→(a)→ . . . It is displayed on the display device 81 . Specifically, on the back side E, an image of a mountain towering over an island, an image of a sandy beach at the foot of the mountain, and an image of the sea surrounding the island are displayed as the third pattern in a state where the displayed positions are fixed. It is displayed on the display device 81 . On the other hand, an image of the sky that spreads over the mountains changes its color tone with the passage of time.

When the stage is changed to the "island stage", the back image shown in FIG. 24(a) is displayed as the initial back image of the back E. FIG. In the rear image shown in FIG. 24(a), an orange sky indicating morning glow is displayed. As time elapses, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to vivid blue, and after a predetermined time elapses, the rear image shown in FIG. 24(b) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 24(b), a vivid blue sky indicating daytime is displayed. Next, as time elapses, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from vivid blue to black, and after a predetermined time elapses, the rear image shown in FIG. 24(c) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 24(c), a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from black to white and further to orange. Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the back image shown in FIG. 24(a) is restored, and the back images shown in FIGS.

Next, for each rear image, the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 23(a), the rear surface A corresponding to the street stage, which is the initial stage, has all the image data corresponding to the entire range of the rear surface A, that is, from position a to position d. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often played without changing the stage while the initial stage "town stage" is displayed. By keeping all of them resident in the back image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, the back surface B corresponding to the "forest stage", the back surface C corresponding to the "river stage", and the back surface D corresponding to the "sky stage" are shown in FIG. That is, only the image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. FIG. In addition, the back side E corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 24(a) and the image data corresponding to the back side images between FIGS. is stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and made resident during the start-up process.

Here, in order to immediately change the back image, it is ideal to keep the entire range of image data for all back images resident in the resident video RAM 235 . As such, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is set to the range from position a to position a' (or the range shown in FIGS. 24(a) to 24(b)). ), and the image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b including the initial position (or the image between FIGS. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, if a lottery at the start of fluctuation decides to change the stage, the resident video RAM 235 can store the characters on the back of the resident video RAM 235. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial positions of the back faces B to D can be immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and scroll display or color tone change with the passage of time. It can be displayed while In addition, since only image data corresponding to a partial range of images are stored for back faces B to D, an increase in storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

After the image of the initial position is displayed on the rear faces B to D, the image data resident in the rear face image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is used to turn the range from position a to position b from left to right. The range from position a to position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from position b' to position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 while scrolling. As a result, the image data from position b' to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from position a to position b is being scrolled. After scrolling the range from position a to position b by using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b' to position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the pattern display device 81 .

24(a) to 24(b) are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 after the image at the initial position is displayed. 24(b)-(c) and FIG. 24(c)-(a) can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. to (b) is set. As a result, the image data corresponding to the images of FIGS. Since the data can be transferred to the video RAM 236, the images shown in FIGS. 24A to 24B are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay. 24(b) to (c) and FIGS. 24(c) to (a) are sequentially displayed on the third pattern display device 81 with the lapse of time using the image data corresponding to the rear image thus obtained. be able to.

Image data stored in the normal-use video RAM 236 in the rear-side images B to E is stored in a sub-area dedicated to rear-side images provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 21) of the normal-use video RAM 236. FIG. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be reliably displayed.

In addition, in the rear faces B to D, the image data stored in the rear face image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to images between position b' and position b. image data is stored redundantly. Under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video image is displayed. By displaying the image from the position b' on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed in a smooth connection on the third pattern display device 81. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data in the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position a and position a' is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the display area. do. As a result, the third pattern display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the images between the positions a to c in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 21, the description is continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for permanently storing the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, in the third pattern area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main patterns with numbers "0" to "9" as the third patterns are resident. As a result, when the third pattern display device 81 performs a variable effect, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. It is possible to quickly start a variable production. Therefore, after the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, although the first symbol display device 37 starts the variable effect, the third symbol display device In 81, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the variable performance is not immediately started.

In addition, in the third design area 235d, as the main designs to which the numbers "0" to "9" are not attached, the main design consisting of the rear design such as a wooden box, and the rear design and characters such as planes, wrapping cloths, helmets, etc. The image data corresponding to the main pattern consisting of the accessory pattern imitating the . These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has passed since one variable effect was stopped. be done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol with no number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols with no numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加

The character design area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. FIG. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy", "old man", and "girl" are displayed according to various effects, and data corresponding to these are displayed in the character pattern area 235e. By being resident, when the display control device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, it does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but stores the resident data. By reading out the image data previously resident in the character design area 235e of the video RAM 235, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. This eliminates the need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the sound ramp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound ramp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. Notify the display controller 114 with an error command. Also, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81 when an error command is received.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the standpoint of preventing fraud by the player and protecting the player against errors. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages are pre-resident in the error message image area 235f. By reading the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. This eliminates the need to sequentially read image data corresponding to error messages from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND type flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is read after receiving an error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data necessary for drawing the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is predetermined.

The MPU 231 extracts image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 in a sub-area provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 . , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area for storing. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234 and transfers the read image data to the designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

It should be noted that the transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image controller 237 writes the one-frame image drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby rendering the one-frame image to the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information with the third pattern display device 81, a process for displaying the image for one frame is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can expand the one-frame image drawn in one of the frame buffers and simultaneously , the image for one frame developed earlier can be read out from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 are used for drawing processing of an image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds of completion, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately specifying the parameters, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing for the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Configured. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, a storage image data discrimination It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a background image change flag 233w, a background image determination flag 233x, a demonstration display flag 233y, and a fixed display flag 233z.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231 . When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After storing all the control programs in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. After all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily implement diversified and complicated effects.

Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on a command from the main controller 110. For example, a variable effect, an opening effect, , round effects, ending effects, and demonstration effects are provided.

The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. In addition, when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variable performance is started, if the stop type of the variable performance is off, the stop symbol indicating the failure is finally stopped and displayed, and the stop type of the variable performance is the jackpot A or the jackpot B. If it is either, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable effect, and can easily determine the game value to be given according to the jackpot type.

The opening performance is a performance for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to a special game state from now on and the large opening that is normally closed will be repeatedly opened, and the round performance will start from now on. This is an effect for informing the player of the number of rounds to be played. The ending effect is a effect for informing the player of the end of the special game state.

In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has passed since one variable effect stopped. The third pattern composed of the main patterns with no numerals '0' to '9' is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player and the persons involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect and the demonstration effect. In addition, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, the variable display data table, which is a display data table for the variable performance, is prepared with one table for one variable performance pattern and a total of 32 tables.

Details of the display data table will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at that time in association with an address that represents the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) during which an image for one frame is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Rendering information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to render sprites, such as values, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying known α-blending coefficients used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. Color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when rendering the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address are one rear image, nine third patterns (design 1, design 2, . Rendering information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. One or a plurality of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification, rotation angle, translucency, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are changed over time. Since it is fixed, the variable display data table defines only the back face type, which is information for specifying the back face image type. The type of back face is the back face A to E corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of "town stage", "forest stage", "river stage", "sky stage", and "island stage"). Information specifying whether to display one of the back images or to display a back image different from the back images A to E is described. Further, in the back face type, when specifying to display a back face image different from back faces A to E, information specifying which back face image is to be displayed is also described.

When the type of back face specifies that one of the back faces A to E is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back face image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the back faces A to E as a drawing target, In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified according to the lapse of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear image different from the rear faces A to E, the rear face image to be displayed is specified from the rear face type.

In the present embodiment, a description will be given of a case in which only the back surface type is specified as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table. may be defined as position information indicating whether the should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started.

Furthermore, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed, and the image drawing based on the display data table (or the third pattern display device 81) according to the back surface type. display) may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or along with the back surface type and position information, the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. information indicating whether or not the background image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. Alternatively, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of information indicating the elapsed time.

The third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ) describe symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Rather than directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop pattern, and in the pattern offset information from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variation performance is described. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (stop type command for display) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 Include information. As a result, the variable effect can be stopped with a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. - 特許庁

In addition, since a unique number is attached to each third symbol, the variable symbol in the previous variable effect or the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. , and the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to each third pattern, the third pattern to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information.

In addition, in the pattern offset information, the third pattern fluctuates at high speed during the predetermined time when the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third pattern is being variably displayed at high speed, the third pattern is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player does not recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described at "0000H", which is the top address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 25) is the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing contents corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table are displayed. is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next A drawing list (see FIG. 27), which will be described later, is created by specifying the image contents to be drawn. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table, so the image specified in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

Here, as in the conventional pachinko machine, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, the effect image becomes more diverse. Therefore, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a risk that the diversification of controllable effect images will be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114 .

In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance in the pachinko machine 10 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the mode of presentation. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized only when the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize.

Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect. Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 for normal use from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 for normal use and its transfer timing are defined.

If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. As a result, an increase in capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table in correspondence with the address. (corresponding to addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 26). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. (corresponding to address "0002H" in FIG. 26).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

It should be noted that, similarly to the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the top address of the transfer data table, and the end address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 26, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 27) to be described later is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 26, when the pointer 233f is "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added, and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237 . On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. process.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, thereby enabling the display to be performed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the display data. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is possible to reliably transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and is associated with an address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Thus, since the timing of the start of transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the third pattern display device 81 can easily display various effects images. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIGS. flag to indicate This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on varying image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , is set to ON in the main process (see FIG. 73) executed by the MPU 231 (see S6005 in FIG. 73). Then, when all the resident object image data are stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer processing of the image transfer processing, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to OFF (see S7605 in FIG. 85(b)).

The simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 75(b)). When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 75(b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6308 in FIG. 75(b) S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 76 to 81) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 82 to 84) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7501 in FIG. 85(a)), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident object image data not stored in resident video RAM 235, resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 85(b)) is executed to transfer the resident object image data from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) is executed to transfer the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It selects and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the rendering content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 A drawing list (see FIG. 27), which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the instruction for drawing an image is described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 adds an image to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 27), which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the drawing instruction is described. As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

The transfer data table buffer 233e transfers a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. is a buffer for storing When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. If all of the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to that display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is included in a later-described rendering list (see FIG. 27) describing the image rendering instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite can be obtained. Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The pointer 233f is an address at which transfer data information of corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data should be obtained from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. is for specifying The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, display setting processing for V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame of image is completed (see FIG. 75(b)). ), the pointer update process (see S7205 in FIG. 84) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Every time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and stores the drawing content in the drawing list described later. (see FIG. 27), acquires the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and obtains the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Therefore, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effects can be displayed.

In addition, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed based on the transfer data table before the corresponding display data table starts drawing a predetermined sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a draw list instructing 237.

Details of the drawing list will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. Symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., number of reserved balls pattern 1, number of reserved balls pattern 2, ..., error (pattern) describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite for each sprite. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its type. The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. alpha blending information, compositing with other sprites, color tone correction according to color information, and filtering according to filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, the pending number of balls to be displayed). Image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw the image for one frame, and provides the detailed information for each sprite. Create a draw list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the RAM type and address for storing the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type defined in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can store the image data according to the sprite type. , the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 sets other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite as defined in the display data table. copy the information as is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged in the front side from the sprites to be arranged in the rearmost side in the image for one frame, and provides detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, followed by the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, . . . ), effect (effect 1, effect 2, . Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, . . . , reserved ball pattern 1, reserved ball pattern 2, .

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and overwrites the drawn sprite in the frame buffer to develop it. Therefore, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

In the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, if the transfer data information is written at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 stores the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 draws an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. When one display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the performance time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81 .

Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of one frame of image are completed, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (FIG. 75(b)). )) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by one (see S7207 in FIG. 82). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 judges that the presentation displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the presentation at the end of the presentation. perform various operations to

The storage image data determination flag 233i is set to indicate whether image data corresponding to all sprites whose corresponding image data are not resident in the resident video RAM 235 are stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

This stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by initial setting processing (see S6002 in FIG. 73) executed by the MPU 231 in the main processing when the power is turned on. The storage image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "OFF" indicating that the storage status for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The storage image data determination flag 233i is updated when an instruction to transfer image data to be transferred corresponding to one sprite is set during normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 86) executed by the MPU 231. will be In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Also, image data of other sprites to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite will always be in a non-stored state when the image data of one sprite is stored. Therefore, the stored state corresponding to the other sprites is set to "off".

Also, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 86). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 86). , causes the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j selects a frame buffer for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 (hereinafter referred to as a "drawing target buffer") from among the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). ), and when the drawing buffer flag 233j is 0, it designates the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing buffer, and when it is 1, it designates the second frame buffer 236c. Then, the information of the specified drawing object buffer is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 87).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of drawing the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. In parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the drawn image information previously developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and transmits the image to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is done by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Also, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the drawing process (see S6306 in FIG. 75B) is performed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately specifying the parameters, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing for the image for one frame.

The back image change flag 233w is a flag for determining whether or not the type of the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is to be changed. If the back image change flag 233w is ON, it means that the type of the back image is changed, and if it is OFF, it means that no change is made. The back image change flag 233w is set to ON when a back image change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received (see S7001 in FIG. 81(a)). The back image change flag 233w is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S7709 in FIG. 86), and is set to OFF when the back image change process is executed (see S7710 in FIG. 86). As a result, the rear image corresponding to the rear image change command and the presentation mode change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 can be displayed.

The back image discrimination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set back image type. This flag consists of, for example, 1 byte, and each bit is associated with each rear face type. If any bit of the back image determination flag 233x is on, it means that the back surface type corresponding to the bit that is on is set as the current back surface type. For example, if the 0th bit of the rear image determination flag 233x is ON, it means that the rear surface A is set. In the rear image determination flag 233x, when a rear image change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received, the bit corresponding to the rear image notified by the command is set to ON (FIG. 81(a)). ) of S7002). At this time, all other bits are set to off. With this back image discrimination flag 233x, the currently set back surface type can be easily identified.

The demonstration display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not a demonstration effect is being performed. If the demonstration display flag 233y is on, it means that the demonstration is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the demonstration is not being performed. The demonstration display flag 233y is set to ON when the demonstration display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 82) (see S7221 in FIG. 82). is set to off when a display data table other than the display data table buffer 233d is set (S6505 in FIG. 77(a), S6705 in FIG. 78(a), S6805 in FIG. 78(b) , S6905 in FIG. 79). With this demonstration display flag 233y, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the demonstration effect is currently being performed.

The fixed display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not the fixed display effect is being executed. Here, the fixed display effect means the effect of stopping display (fixed display) of the stop symbol for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the variation pattern. If the confirmation display flag 233z is ON, it means that the confirmation display effect is being performed, and if it is OFF, it means that the confirmation display effect is not being performed. The fixed display flag 233z is set to ON when the fixed display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 82) (S7214 in FIG. 82). It is set to OFF when another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d (S6505 in FIG. 77A, S6705 in FIG. 78A, S6805 in FIG. 78B, FIG. 79, S6905). With this confirmation display flag 233z, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the confirmation display effect is currently being performed.

<Regarding the control process executed by the main controller in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 28 to 56. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this embodiment). There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing that is activated by input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. and main processing.

FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . Timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various winning switch reading processes are executed (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (232 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203 .

Furthermore, the update of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second hit random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 is executed (S103). Specifically, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second per random number counter C4 and the small per type counter C5 are each added by 1, and their counter values are maximum When the values (479, 99, 239, 232 and 99 respectively in this embodiment) are reached, they are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. FIG.

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). After that, the start winning process associated with the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) and the ball entering the second ball opening 640 (start winning) is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is the process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is opened as the ball passes through. A gate passage process is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. FIG. After executing the through gate passing process, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be periodically executed are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process ends. Note that the shooting control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is the process of deciding on/off of firing. Main controller 110 gives a ball launch instruction to launch controller 112 when ball launch is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the special symbol variation process (S104), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). The special symbol variation process (FIG. 29, S104) performs various judgments (appropriateness judgment) and determination based on the acquired counter values of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and determines the determination by predetermined control. Various commands for controlling the first pattern display device 37 to enable the variable display in the variable display mode, and for executing the variable display effect of the third and fourth symbols in the third pattern display device 81 are issued. Control is executed for setting and stopping display in a display mode showing the judgment result (positiveness judgment result). The special symbol variation processing (FIG. 29, S104) will be described below.

In the special symbol variation process (FIG. 29, S104), first, it is determined whether it is during the big winning game (during the big winning) or during the small winning game (during the small winning) (S201). Here, based on the information stored in the game state storage area 203k, it is determined whether the present is during the big winning game (during the big winning) or during the small winning game (during the small winning).

In the process of S201, if it is determined that it is during the big hit or the small hit (S201: Yes), then it is determined whether the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203i is set to ON (S202), ON (S202: Yes), the display of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the temporarily stopped special figure is updated (S203), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S202, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203i is not set to ON (S202: No), it is determined whether the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203j is set to ON ( S204). When it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203j is set to ON (S204: Yes), the display of the first symbol display device corresponding to the temporarily stopped special figure is updated (S205), End this process. On the other hand, in the process of S204, when it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203j is not ON (that is, it is OFF), (S204: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Here, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203i is set to ON when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) in a display mode indicating that the small hit A is won. In the present embodiment, while the small winning A game is being executed, the variable time set in the variable display (special figure variable display) for showing the lottery result of the special symbol is not updated (subtracted). During that period, the first symbol display device 37 is configured to display a temporary stop display mode for indicating that the variable display of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped.

Further, the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203j is set to ON when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that the big hit B is won. In this embodiment, while the jackpot B is set, the variation time of the first special symbol is not updated, and during that period, the second special symbol is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. It is configured so that the mode is not updated.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player that the variable display of the special symbol that was being executed along with the start of the small winning game or the big winning game is temporarily stopped, It is possible to prevent a player from feeling distrust if the special symbol variation being executed disappears. In addition, as a display mode for indicating that the variable display of special symbols is temporarily stopped, for example, a display mode for indicating that normal variable display is in progress (for example, lighting at intervals of 0.2 seconds, It may be the same display mode as the flashing display mode that repeats turning off), or a display mode with a slower blinking interval than the display mode for indicating that the variable display is in progress (for example, repeatedly turning on and off at 0.5 second intervals) blinking display mode) may be used. Furthermore, when the display mode of the first pattern display device 37 is configured to be able to display a plurality of colors, a flashing display mode using a dedicated color that can be displayed only during temporary stop is used. Also good.

On the other hand, in the process of S201, if it is determined that the present is not during the big hit or during the small hit (S201: No), the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is greater than 0, that is, the first It is determined whether or not the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner (S206). When it is determined that the first special symbol is being varied and displayed (the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203r is greater than 0) (S206: Yes), the first special symbol variation executing process is executed ( S207).

In this first special symbol variation executing process (S207), the variation display mode of the special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is changed (updated) during the period when the first special symbol is varying. process is executed. Then, when the processing of S207 is completed, next, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203r updated in the first special symbol variation in-execution processing (S207) is 0 (S208), S208 If it is determined that the special figure 1 variation time counter 203r is 0 in the process of (S208: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop process is executed (S209), and the process proceeds to S211, which will be described later.

In the first special symbol variation stop process (S209), when the variation time defined for the first special symbol being displayed in variation has passed, the process of stopping the variation display with the symbol indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol. is executed. In addition, in the first special symbol variation stop process (S209), when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit, the second special symbol being executed is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a loss. is executed. Furthermore, when the second special symbol being executed wins a jackpot, a process for erasing the information about the jackpot is executed. The details of this first special symbol variation stop process (S209) will be described later with reference to FIG. Also, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is not 0 in the process of S208 (S208: No), the process of S209 is skipped and the process proceeds to S211.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variation time counter 203r is not greater than 0 (is 0) in the process of S206 (S206: No), that is, when it is determined that the special figure 1 is not currently varying Next, the first special symbol variation start process is executed (S210). In this first special symbol variation start process (S210), a process for executing a new lottery (variation) of the first special symbol is performed, and a new lottery (variation) can be executed. If it is determined whether a new lottery (variation) can be executed, a process of performing a new lottery (variation) is executed. This first special symbol variation start process (S210) will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS.

After executing the first special symbol variation start process (S210), after determining that the special figure 1 is being varied in the process of S208 (S208: No), or after performing the first special symbol variation stop process (S207) After execution, next, variation processing (S211 to S215) regarding the second special symbol is executed.

First, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is greater than 0 (S211). That is, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol (special figure 2) is currently displayed in a variable manner. If it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 variation time counter 203s is not greater than 0 (0) in the process of S211 (S211: No), the present is not in the special figure 2 variation, so the next Then, a second special symbol variation start process for executing a new lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is executed (S212), and this process is terminated.

In the second special symbol variation start process (S212), if the retention data (various counter values) is stored in the second special symbol retention ball number storage area 203b, the big hit determination and variation pattern selection based on the retention data Processing is performed. Also, in the second special symbol variation start process (S212), when the lottery result is a big hit (or a small hit), the big hit flag 203n (or the small hit flag 203p) is set to ON.

On the other hand, in the process of S211, the value of the special figure 2 variation time counter 203s is greater than 0, that is, if it is determined that the current special figure 2 variation is (S211: Yes), then the second A special symbol variation executing process is executed (S213). The contents of this second special symbol variation in-execution process (S213) will be described later with reference to FIG. is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol and executed.

Then, when the second special symbol variation in-execution process (S213) is finished, it is determined whether the value of the current special figure 2 variation time counter 203s is 0 (S214), and if it is determined to be 0 (S214 : Yes), the second special symbol variation stop process is executed (S215), and then this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is not 0 in the process of S214 (S214: No), the process of S215 is skipped and the process ends.

The second special symbol variation stop processing (S215) will be described later with reference to FIG. 42, but as with the first special symbol variation stop processing (S209), it is defined in the second special symbol being displayed in a variable manner. When the fluctuation time has passed, the process of stopping the fluctuation display with the symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is executed. In addition, in the second special symbol variation stop processing (S213), when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big win, the first special symbol variation being executed is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a failure. Processing is performed. Furthermore, when the second special symbol being executed wins a jackpot, a process for erasing the information about the jackpot is executed. In addition, in this embodiment, since it is configured to be able to win a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is not a big hit, it corresponds to a small hit or a loss. process is executed.

As described above with reference to FIG. 29, in the present embodiment, the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol can be executed at the same time (in parallel). , the variation processing (S206 to S210) regarding the first special symbol and the variation processing (S211 to S215) regarding the second special symbol are executed in one special symbol variation processing. Therefore, when it becomes possible to execute a new lottery (change) for each special symbol, the change process can be executed without delay, and a smooth game can be provided.

Further, in this embodiment, in one special symbol variation process, the variation process regarding the first special symbol is configured to be executed prior to (preferentially) the variation process regarding the second special symbol. Thus, by clearly setting the processing order of each special symbol, even if the variation stop timing of the first special symbol and the variation stop timing of the second special symbol are the same, priority is given to the second special symbol. 1 special symbol fluctuation stop processing will be executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the variation processing regarding the first special symbol is configured to be executed with priority over the variation processing regarding the second special symbol, but the variation regarding the second special symbol is not limited to this. The processing may be configured to be executed with priority over the variation processing regarding the first special symbol.

In addition, it may be configured to preferentially execute the variation processing for the special symbol type in which a lottery that is advantageous to the player is executed in the set game state, and the player can choose according to the set game state. If it is a pachinko machine 10 in which the special symbol types for which the lottery that is advantageous to the game is executed is switched, it is preferable to provide a means for switching the order of the special symbol types for executing the variation processing. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the lottery result of the lottery that is advantageous to the player from disappearing (discarding) due to the lottery result that is disadvantageous to the player.

Next, referring to FIG. 30, the first special symbol variation start process (S210), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 29), will be described. FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation start process (S210).

In the first special symbol variation start process (S210 in FIG. 30), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired (S301), and the value of the acquired first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is It is determined whether the value (N1) is greater than 0 (S302). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S302: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S303 ).

Then, set the number of reserved balls command indicating the number of reserved balls after subtraction (S304), the data stored in the reserved area 1 to the reserved area 4 of the first special symbol reserved number of balls storage area 203a, the execution area A process for sequentially shifting to the side is performed (S305). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of reservation area 1→execution area, reservation area 2→reservation area 1, reservation area 3→reservation area 2, reservation area 4→reservation area 3, and so on.

Next, a first special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S306). The first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 31) will be described in detail later. Based on the game state that has been set, a big win determination is executed as to whether or not a big win has occurred.

Next, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S307). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307), which will be described later in detail, is based on the result of the success/failure determination based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the first special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown). This is a process for selecting a variation pattern based on each counter value.

Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S210 in FIG. 30), will be described. FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306).

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 31), first, each counter value stored in the first special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is obtained (S401). Then, in order to determine whether or not the current game state is a high probability state (probability variation state, latent probability state) of special symbols, it is determined whether the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON (S402). When it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is on (that is, the special symbol is in a high probability state) (S402: Yes), based on the first per random number table 202a (see FIG. 11(a)), S401 It is determined whether or not the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired in the process of 1) matches the big winning judgment value in the high probability state, and the lottery result (judgment result) is acquired (S403).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is off (that is, the special symbol is in a low probability state) (S402: No), based on the first per random number table 202a (see FIG. 171a), the It is determined whether or not the value of the random number counter C1 per hit coincides with the jackpot determination value in the low probability state, and the lottery result (determination result) is obtained (S404).

When the process of S403 or S404 is completed, next, it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a big hit (S405), and if it is determined to be a big hit (S405: Yes), the first special symbol jackpot is won. As shown, the jackpot flag 203n is set to ON (S406). In this embodiment, the jackpot flag 203n is configured to be able to store (set) information indicating the type of special symbol that has won the jackpot in addition to the information indicating whether or not the jackpot has been won. Information indicating the presence or absence of a big hit can be set for each symbol type. Therefore, in the processing of S406, information indicating a big win is set for the area corresponding to the first special symbol among the big win flags 203n.

Then, the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to a big hit (S407), and the big hit symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set based on the value of the acquired winning type counter C2 ( S408), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S405 that the lottery result of this time is not a big hit (S405: No), the first special symbol is set in the first symbol display device 37 (S409), and the process is terminated. do.

Next, referring to FIG. 32, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S210 in FIG. 30), will be described. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307).

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307 in FIG. 32), first, in the first special symbol big hit determination process (S306 in FIG. 31), whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit, that is, It is determined whether or not the jackpot of the first special symbol is set (S501). Here, whether or not the big win is determined is determined by whether or not the big win flag 203n is turned on for the first special symbol. This jackpot flag 203n is set to ON in the processing of S406 in the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination processing (see FIG. 31).

When it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit (S501: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variable probability flag 203g is ON (S502). That is, it is determined whether or not the current game state of the pachinko machine 10 is a variable probability state (high probability of special symbols, high probability of normal symbols). Probability variation flag 203g, in the processing of S2705 of the jackpot end processing (see FIG. 55), when it is determined that the jackpot type that was elected is jackpot A (S2705: Yes), turn on to set the probability variation state after the jackpot ends is set to Then, in the processing of S502, when it is determined that the time saving flag 203m is off (S502: Yes), the current game state is the normal state, so the normal jackpot type selection table 202d1 is acquired. Based on the first winning type counter CS2, the big winning type of this time is determined (S503). On the other hand, in the process of S502, if it is determined that the time saving flag 203m is ON (S502: Yes), based on the value of the first per type counter C2 that has been acquired from the probability variation jackpot type selection table 202d2, The jackpot type of this time is determined (S504). On the other hand, in the process of S501, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big win (that is, the big win flag 203n is off), the process of S502 to S504 is skipped because there is no need to determine the big win type. , S505.

In this embodiment, as described above, the winning jackpot type is set to be different based on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, so the player always plays the game while being excited about which jackpot type will be won. It can be carried out. In this embodiment, the jackpot type is determined based on the game state, but the jackpot type may be determined based on the number of balls held when the jackpot is won without being limited to this.

After one of the processes of S501, S503, S504 is completed, next, the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the first special symbol execution area is acquired (S505), and stored in the gaming state storage area 203k. The variation pattern selection table 202e corresponding to the current game state (normal state, latent state, variable probability state) corresponding to the information is read (S506).

Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 acquired in the process of S505 and the variation pattern selection table 202e read in the process of S506 (S507), and based on the variation pattern selected in the process of S507 Then, set the special figure 1 variation pattern command (S508).

Next, set a special figure 1 stop type command indicating the stop symbol of the first special symbol (S509), set the start of variation of the first special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 (S510), and select the selected variation pattern. A value indicating the fluctuation time of is set to the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r (S511), and the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the first special symbol variation executing process (S207), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 of FIG. 28), will be described. FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation executing process (S207). In this first special symbol variation in-execution process (S205), a process for updating the variation time of the special symbol variation being executed and a special interrupted by winning a small hit in the second special symbol lottery A process for resuming symbol variation is executed.

In the first special symbol variation executing process (S205), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203i is set to ON. This special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203i is set to ON when a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol. In this embodiment, when one special symbol wins a small win, the small win type is a small win A and the other special symbol is displayed in a variable display, the other special symbol variation is displayed for a predetermined period. (Period from the winning of the small prize until the end of the small prize game) is interrupted, and after the passage of a predetermined period (after the end of the small prize game), the other special symbol variation is resumed again. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the execution of a game that is difficult for the player to understand due to the end of the special symbol variation of the other during the small winning game of one. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, it is configured to determine whether the variation of the other special symbol is interrupted or discarded depending on the winning small winning type. You can enjoy the game while your heart is pounding.

In the process of S701, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203i is set to ON (S701: Yes), set the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command (S702), and set the special figure 1 temporary stop flag It is set to OFF (S703), the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is subtracted by 1 (S704), the display of the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S705), and this process is terminated. .

In this embodiment, within the special symbol variation processing (see S104 of FIG. 29) executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 28) executed every 2 milliseconds, the first special symbol variation executing process ( (see S205 in FIG. 31) is configured to be executed, and the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203r is updated (decremented by 1) within the first special symbol variation executing process (see S207 in FIG. 32) It is configured as follows. Therefore, for example, when the fluctuation time of 30 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, "15000" is set as the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r, and the value is 1 every 2 milliseconds. It is configured to be subtracted.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203i is not set to ON in the process of S701 (S701: No), that is, when it is determined that the small hit is not won in the lottery of the second special symbol skips the processes of S702 and S703 and proceeds to the process of S704.

Next, referring to FIG. 34, the first special symbol variation stop process (S209), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 29), will be described. FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation stop processing (S209). This first special symbol variation stop process (S207) is performed when it is determined that the current value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203r is "0", that is, the variation time of the first special symbol (special figure 1) This is a process that is executed when the period has elapsed.

When the first special symbol variation stop process (S209 in FIG. 34) is executed, it is first determined whether the big hit flag 203n is set to ON for the first special symbol (special figure 1) (S801). When it is determined that the jackpot flag 203n is set to ON for the first special symbol (S801: Yes), next, it is determined whether the jackpot type won this time is jackpot A or jackpot C. (S802). If it is determined that the jackpot type is not A or C (S802: No), the special figure 2 temporary stop process (S803) is executed, and the process proceeds to S812.

Here, with reference to FIG. 35, the special figure 2 temporary stop process (S803), which is one process of the first special symbol variation stop process (S209 in FIG. 34), will be described. In this special figure 2 temporary stop process (S803), when the process of stopping the variation of the first special symbol is executed, when the variation result is the big hit B, the variation of the second special symbol is interrupted. Execute the process.

In the special figure 2 temporary stop processing (S803), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is greater than 0, that is, whether or not the second special symbol is fluctuating (S831). If it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 variation time counter 203s is not greater than 0 (that is, it is 0) (S831: No), it is necessary to interrupt (temporarily stop) the variation of the second special symbol. Since there is no such data, the processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S831, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is greater than 0 (S831: Yes), the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203j is set to ON (S832) , Set a special figure 2 temporary stop command indicating that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203j has been turned on (S833), and terminate this process.

In this embodiment, when the big win B is won by the variation of the first special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol is temporarily stopped (interrupted), and the second special symbol is restarted after the big winning game is finished. ing. By constructing in this way, it is possible to provide a game that arouses the player's interest as to whether the variation of the second special pattern is interrupted or forcibly stopped due to the deviation of the type of the big win this time. In this embodiment, when the big hit B is won, the variation of the second special symbol is temporarily stopped. good. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with a thrilling feeling of not knowing when the other special symbol will be temporarily stopped.

Returning to FIG. 34, the description continues. In the process of S802, when it is determined that the jackpot type won this time is the jackpot A or the jackpot C (S802: Yes), the process for forcibly stopping the variation of the second special symbol is executed. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is a value greater than 0 (S804). When it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is a value greater than 0 (S804: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is set to ON (S805), and the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag Set the special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that 203o has been turned on (S806).

Next, the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed in the off symbol (S807), and the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is set to 0 (S808). As a result, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the jackpot, the variable display of the second special symbol (special figure 2) being executed is stopped and displayed in the display mode (outgoing symbol) indicating the loss. (confirmed display).

When the processing of S808 is finished, next, it is determined whether the big hit flag 203n for the second special symbol is set to ON (S809), and if it is determined that the big hit flag 203n is set to ON (S809: Yes), in order to adapt the lottery result of the second special symbol to the second special symbol that was forcibly removed and stopped and displayed in the process of S807 described above, turn off the jackpot flag 203n for the second special symbol. Set (S810), delete the stored information for the special figure 2 jackpot (S811), and proceed to the process of S812. On the other hand, in the processing of S809, when it is determined that the jackpot has not been won in the second special symbol lottery, the processing of S810 and S811 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S812.

In the process of S812, first, the jackpot scenario that was won in this special symbol variation is set (S812), and then the jackpot flag 202u corresponding to the first special symbol, the probability variation flag 203g, and the time saving flag 203m are set to off ( S813), information indicating that the current game state is during a big win (during a big win game) is stored in the game state storage area 203k (S814). The game state storage area 203k is configured to be able to separately store the game state (normal state, variable probability state, latent probability state) regarding the lottery game and the game state (middle hit, medium hit) regarding the winning game. By executing the process of S811, the game state (normal state, probability variable state, latent probability state) related to the lottery game at the timing of winning the jackpot and the game state indicating that the jackpot is in progress are stored. .

By configuring in this way, it is possible to determine the game state set at the timing of winning the big win at the end of the big win game.

When the processing of S814 is finished, next, a special figure 1 confirmation command for instructing the sound lamp control device 113 to decide and stop the first special symbol is set (S815), and the first special symbol display device A process of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner at 37 is executed (S816), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S801, if it is determined that the jackpot flag 203n is not set to ON for the first special symbol (S801: No), the processes of S802 to S814 are skipped, and S815 described above is skipped. Go to processing.

Thus, in the first special symbol variation stop process (S209), the process (S812 to S816) of stopping the variation display with the symbol indicating the result of the first special symbol lottery (first lottery game) is executed. Also, when the lottery result of this time is a big hit (S801: Yes), the second special symbol during variation is forcibly stopped and displayed so that the lottery result is lost (S807). In this way, in the process of stopping and displaying (confirmed display) one of the special symbols with a symbol indicating a big win, by executing the process of forcibly stopping the other special symbol during variation, Appropriate processing can be executed for a plurality of special symbol variations that are executed.

That is, like the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in a configuration in which the variation processing regarding the first special symbol and the variation processing regarding the second special symbol are sequentially performed, the processing is performed based on the lottery result of the first special symbol. By executing the variation processing (forced stop processing) of the second special symbol within the variation processing regarding the first special symbol, the second special symbol is forcibly stopped at the timing when the variation processing regarding the second special symbol is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the processing related to the second special symbol from being duplicated and to execute the processing smoothly.

In addition, in this embodiment, at the timing when one special symbol is stop-displayed as a symbol indicating a big win, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped as a symbol indicating a loss. For example, if it is determined that one special symbol has won the jackpot, that is, if it is determined that the current lottery result is a jackpot in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 31) ( In S405 of FIG. 31: Yes), the variation of the other special symbol may be forcibly stopped at the off symbol. In this case, it is preferable to execute a special variation that does not win a jackpot for the period until the big winning variation of one special symbol ends for the other special symbol that is forcibly lost and stopped. By constructing in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that when one special symbol wins a jackpot, the other special symbol variation is forcibly stopped. Therefore, it is possible to discriminate that the other special symbol variation has been forcibly stopped and displayed, and to prevent the player from grasping whether or not the big win has been won.

In addition, when controlling the variation of the other special symbol during execution based on the result of the lottery of one special symbol, the contents of variation control are varied according to the result of the lottery of the other special symbol being executed. For example, at the timing when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol, if the lottery of the second special symbol is fluctuating (losing fluctuation) to indicate that the lottery is lost, the lottery The result is discarded, and a forced stop process is executed to forcibly stop the deviation fluctuation, and the result of the lottery of the second special symbol is a win (big win, small win) during the fluctuation (win fluctuation). In some cases, after the jackpot game of the first special symbol is finished, the interruption process may be executed so that the variation of the second special symbol can be resumed.

In this case, after the jackpot game with the first special symbol is finished, the player is interested in whether the second special symbol variation is newly executed or the interrupted second special symbol variation is resumed. You can play games. Furthermore, when such a configuration is used, it is configured to execute a suggestive effect for suggesting to the player the situation of the second special symbol during the jackpot game of the first special symbol (whether it is interrupted or not). good to do

Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the second special symbol variation start process (S212), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 29), will be described. FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol variation start process (S212).

When the second special symbol variation start process (S212) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 variation stop flag 203o is set to ON (S901). That is, the first special symbol lottery (first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S306 of FIG. 31 )) to determine whether or not the jackpot has been won.

In the process of S901, if it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is set to ON (S901: Yes), various processes for starting the fluctuation of the second special symbol are skipped, special figure 2 The fluctuation stop flag 203o is set to OFF (S902), and this process is terminated. That is, in the present embodiment, by using the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S306 in FIG. 31), the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the jackpot symbol, and the second It is prohibited to execute a new second special symbol variation after forcibly stop-displaying the special symbol with the deviating symbol. As a result, even if the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed within the variation process relating to the first special symbol, the control process can be executed without causing any trouble.

In this embodiment, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is set to ON in the process of S901 (S901: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is configured to be set to OFF Therefore, by setting the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o, the second special symbol fluctuation start process (S212 in FIG. 36) can be skipped only once.

This is the lottery of the first special symbol executed (within the same special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 29)) (the first special symbol Only when the jackpot is won in the jackpot determination process (see S306 in FIG. 31), if the second special symbol variation start process (S212 in FIG. 36) to be executed immediately after is skipped, then the first special symbol jackpot A jackpot game is started based on the jackpot information (jackpot scenario) set in the determination process (see S306 of FIG. 31), and the jackpot game ends by the process of S201 of the special symbol variation process (see S104 of FIG. 29). This is because the second special symbol variation start process (S212 in FIG. 36) is not executed until it is done.

By configuring in this way, based on the lottery result of one of the special symbols, it is possible to simplify the process of skipping the variation processing of the other special symbol, control processing executed by the main controller 110 processing load can be reduced.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a predetermined lottery result (big hit winning), the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed (stopped with a missing symbol), and one special symbol is displayed. A special figure 2 variation stop flag 203o is set to prevent the execution of a new variation (lottery) of the other special symbol until the big winning game based on the lottery result of the symbol is executed, and the variation processing of the other special symbol is performed. is skipped once, other configurations may be used.

In other words, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a predetermined lottery result (jackpot winning), the other special symbol lottery (fluctuation) is not won in the other special symbol lottery (fluctuation) until the jackpot game based on the jackpot winning ends. For example, when a jackpot control process (see S2512 in FIG. 53) for executing a jackpot game is executed in the main process (see FIG. 52) of the main control device 110 to be described later, special figure 2 The fluctuation stop flag 203o may be configured to be set to OFF.

By configuring in this way, even if the timing to turn on the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is set before the timing at which the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the jackpot symbol, until the jackpot game is executed. It is possible to prohibit execution of a new variation (lottery) of the second special symbol.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the second special symbol variation start process (see S212 in FIG. 36) is executed in a state where the special figure 2 variation stop flag 203o is set to ON, variation of the second special symbol Skip the process, that is, it is configured not to start a new variation (the second special symbol is kept stopped), but not limited to this, the special figure 2 variation stop flag 203o is turned on It may be configured to execute the variable display of the second special symbol dedicated to the case where it is set.

In this case, a lottery for the second special pattern is carried out using a special lottery that does not win a big hit, and the variation display of the second special pattern is executed during a period corresponding to the variation pattern determined based on the result of the special lottery. Alternatively, the period until the jackpot game based on the jackpot winning of the first special pattern is executed without executing the lottery of the second special pattern, the period until the specific timing during the jackpot game is reached. Alternatively, the second special symbol may be variably displayed until the jackpot game ends. This makes it difficult for the player to understand that the special symbol variation has been forcibly stopped.

It should be noted that the content of the variation processing for each special symbol described above is configured to be appropriately output to the sound lamp control device 113 side by setting a command indicating the content, and the third symbol display device The variable display of the third and fourth symbols displayed in the main display area Dm of 81 can be synchronized with the display mode of each special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 described above. However, while the second special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is forcibly stopped, the voice lamp control device 113 side receives a command indicating that the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. In this case, the third pattern or the fourth pattern corresponding to the second special pattern variably displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is used to execute the variable effect during the forced stop. Also good.

In this way, by using each symbol (third symbol, fourth symbol) which is variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol on the third symbol display device 81 which is easy for the player to visually recognize, the actual second special symbol is displayed. It is possible to make it difficult for a player to understand that the special symbol variation is forcibly stopped even when the variation performance is executed while the symbol is forcibly stopped.

In the processing of S901, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is not set to ON, that is, the first special symbol is not stopped and displayed in the jackpot symbol (S901: No), S903 to S909 , and terminate this process. The processing of S903 to S909 is different from the processing of S301 to S307 of the above-described first special symbol variation start processing (S210 in FIG. The value of the number of balls counter (N1), the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306), the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307), the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, second special symbol reserved ball number counter value (N2), second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, second special symbol jackpot determination process (S908), second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S909) Since they are the same except for the changed points, the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S908), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (S212 in FIG. 36), will be described. FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S908). This second special symbol jackpot determination process (S908) is different from the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 31) in that the target special symbol type is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol. , and some other processing was added.

The second special symbol jackpot determination process (S908 in FIG. 37) differs from the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 31) in the following points. That is, in the process of S1001 corresponding to the process of S401, the first special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is changed to the second special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown), and S406 to S408. In the processing of S1006 to S1008 corresponding to the processing of, when the target is changed from special figure 1 (first special symbol) to special figure 2 (second special symbol), and the lottery result of the special symbol is out The difference is that the process to be executed is changed. Since the other points are the same, the description thereof is omitted.

In the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S908 in FIG. 37), if it is determined that the lottery of this time is not a jackpot (S1005: No), the special figure 2 loss variation process is executed (S1009), and this process ends. do.

This special figure 2 loss fluctuation processing (S1009) is the processing which is executed when the lottery result of the second special symbol is other than the big win, that is, the small win or the loss. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 37, but if the lottery result is a loss, the same processing as S409 of the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination processing (S306 in FIG. 35) is executed, If the result of the lottery is a small win, processing corresponding to winning a small win is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 37, the contents of the special figure 2 deviation variation processing (S1009) will be described. FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing the special figure 2 deviation process (S1009).

In special figure 2 deviation fluctuation processing (S1009), first, this lottery result (lottery result obtained in S1003 or S1004 of second special symbol jackpot determination processing (see S905 in FIG. 36)) is a small hit is determined (S1101).

When it is determined that the small hit is won in the process of S1101 (S1101: Yes), the small hit flag 203x is set to ON (S1102), and the lottery result of the second special symbol is set to the small hit (S1103 ), and then set the small winning symbol of the second special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 (S1104), and terminate this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S1101, if it is determined that the lottery result of this time is not a small hit, that is, that it is out (S1101: No), the second special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. is set (S1105), and the process ends.

As described above, the second special symbol variation start process (see S212 of FIG. 36) is executed as one process of the special figure 2 deviation variation process (S1009 of FIG. 38), that is, the variation of the special symbol (lottery) By setting the small hit flag 203x to ON when it is determined that the small hit is won in the process executed at the start timing, the setting status of the small hit flag 203x at the timing of stopping the fluctuation of the second special symbol. It is possible to easily execute the processing corresponding to the winning of the small prize.

Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (S212 of FIG. 36), will be described. FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906).

The second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906 in FIG. 39) differs from the above-described first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307 in FIG. 32) in the following points. In the process of S901 corresponding to the process of S501, the special figure 1 lottery result (lottery result of the first special symbol) is changed to the special figure 2 lottery result (lottery result of the second special symbol), S506 to S507 In each process of S906 to S907 corresponding to each process up to, the special figure 1 variation pattern command (first special symbol variation pattern command) is changed to the special figure 2 variation pattern command. Since other points are the same, detailed description is omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 40, the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern executed in the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906) which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (S212 in FIG. 36) The content of the selection process (S1207 in FIG. 40) will be described.

When the second special symbol variation start process (S212 in FIG. 36) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a small hit (S1301). In the process of S1301, determination is performed based on the lottery result acquired in the process of S1003 or S1004 of the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see S908 in FIG. 37).

In the process of S1301, if it is determined that the lottery result of this time is a small hit (S1301: Yes), then the value of the small hit type counter C5 is acquired (S1302), and the obtained small hit type counter C5 A small hit type is selected based on the value (S1303). In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since there is only one type of small hit type, different small hit types are not set based on the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5, but for example, a plurality of If the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to set the small winning type, a small winning type selection table that defines different small winning types for the range of values of the obtained small winning type counter C5 is provided, S1302 and S1303. It may be configured to select a different small hit type depending on the processing.

When the processing of S1303 is finished, next, the variation pattern selection table corresponding to the current gaming state is read (S1304), and based on the read variation pattern selection table and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1, small winning Select a variation pattern (small hit variation pattern) (S1305). Then, set the special figure 2 variation pattern command indicating the small hit variation pattern selected in the process of S1305 (S1306), and terminate this process.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1301 that the current lottery result is not a small win (no) (S1301: No), the process (S1307 to S1309) for the case where the lottery result is a loss is executed. In the process of S1307, first, the variation pattern selection table corresponding to the gaming state is read (S1307), a variation pattern is selected based on the value of the acquired variation type counter CS2 (S1308), and a special feature is selected based on the selected variation pattern. The FIG. 2 variation pattern command is set (S1309), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the contents of the second special symbol variation executing process (S213), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 of FIG. 28), will be described. FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol variation in-execution process (S213). A process for updating the variation of the second special symbol is executed, and when the variation of the second special symbol is temporarily stopped, a process for restarting the variation is executed.

In the second special symbol variation executing process (S213), it is first determined whether the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203j is ON (S1401). Special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203j is ON, that is, when it is determined that the second special symbol is temporarily stopped (S1401: Yes), special figure 2 for restarting the variation of the second special symbol Set the restart command (S1402), set the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203j to OFF (S1403), and proceed to the processing of S1404. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203j is not ON (S1401: No), the second special symbol is not temporarily stopped, so the process proceeds to S1404.

S1401, or after executing the processing of S1403, next, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is subtracted and updated (S1404), and the display of the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is updated. (S1405), this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the second special symbol variation stop process (S215), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 28), will be described. FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing this second special symbol variation stop process (S215). In the second special symbol variation stop process (S215), the processing target is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol in contrast to the above-described first special symbol variation stop process (see S209 in FIG. 33). , The content of the process that is executed when the lottery result is other than a big hit is changed, the process of setting a flag to stop the fluctuation of the other special symbol is omitted, and the lottery result of this time is a big hit When it is determined that it is not (S1501: No), the difference is that the special figure 2 out stop processing (S1514) is executed. Since other points are the same, detailed description is omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the contents of the special figure 2 deviation stop processing (S1508) executed in the second special symbol variation stop processing (see FIG. 42) will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 deviating stop processing (S1508). This special figure 2 out stop processing (S1508) is the special symbol variation corresponding to the case where the lottery result obtained in the second big hit determination processing (see S908 in FIG. 37) is other than the big hit (small hit or off). A stop process is executed, and a process of canceling (forced stop) or temporarily stopping the fluctuation of the first special symbol is executed according to the type of small hit won.

When the special figure 2 out stop processing (S1614) is executed, it is first determined whether the small hit flag 203x is set to ON (S1601), and if it is determined that the small hit flag 203x is set to ON (S1601: Yes), it is determined whether or not the small hit type won this time is the small hit A (S1602). When it is determined that the small hit type that has been elected this time is the small hit A (S1602: Yes), a process for temporarily stopping the variation of the first special symbol is executed. Specifically, first, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203r is 0 or more, that is, whether the first special symbol is varying (S1603). If it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is greater than 0 (S1603: Yes), the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203i is set to ON (S1604), and the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203i is turned on Set a special figure 1 temporary stop command indicating (S1605), and move to the process of S1606. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is 0 (S1603: No), the first special symbol is not in fluctuation, so the processing of S1604 to S1605 is skipped, and the processing of S1607 transition to

In the present embodiment, only the second special symbol is configured to win a small hit, and the variation of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped (suspended) when the variation of the second special symbol is stopped according to the type of the won small hit. ), or forcibly stop due to deviation. As described above, when the winning small hit type is a small hit A, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203i is set to ON, and the special figure 1 temporary stop command is sent to the main processing of the main controller 110 (Fig. 52 ) is output to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output processing (S2401) executed in step S2401. Then, when the special figure 1 temporary stop command is received on the voice lamp control device 113 side, the temporary stop mode for indicating that the first special symbol (special figure 1) is temporarily stopped (is being done) A display command for displaying on the third pattern display device 81 is set and output to the display control device 114 . The display control device 114 executes processing for displaying the temporary stop mode display of the special figure 1 on the third symbol display device 81 based on the received display command. By configuring in this way, the player can easily grasp that the first special symbol is temporarily stopped.

On the other hand, in the process of S1602, when it is determined that the winning small hit type is not A (that is, it is a small hit B), special figure 1 canceling process (S1606) is executed, S1607 Go to processing.

Here, with reference to FIG. 43, the special figure 1 canceling process (S1606), which is one process of the special figure 2 deviating stop process (S1514 in FIG. 43), will be described. In this special figure 1 canceling process (S1606), when executing the process of stopping the variation of the second special symbol, when the variation result is a small hit B, the variation of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped. process.

In the special figure 1 canceling process (S1606), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is greater than 0 (S1651). If it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is not greater than 0 (S1651: No), it is not necessary to forcibly stop the first special symbol, so this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S1651, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is greater than 0 (S1651: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command is set (S1652). This special figure 1 fluctuation stop command is output to the audio lamp control device 113 by the external output processing (S2401) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 52) of the main control device 110, which will be described later. And, when the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command is received at the voice lamp control device 113 side, the first special symbol (special figure 1) is forced to stop due to the disconnection (that is, it is done). is set on the third symbol display device 81 and output to the display control device 114 .

Next, the first special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed as a symbol (S1654). Then, the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is set to 0 (S1655), and the process proceeds to S1656. In the processing of S1656, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203n corresponding to the special figure 1 is ON (S1656). When it is determined that the jackpot flag 203n is OFF (S1656: Yes), the jackpot flag 203n is set to OFF (S1657), the stored information for the special figure 1 jackpot is deleted (S1658), and this processing is terminated. . On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot flag 203n is not ON (S1656: No), this process is terminated.

In the present embodiment, when winning a small hit B in the special figure 2 game, the special figure 1 fluctuation being executed is forced to stop due to deviation. By constructing in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game by winning a big win disadvantageous to the player during the latent sure game, and to provide a safe game.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the control of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed independently and in parallel. The special pattern and the second special pattern can be variably displayed at the same time. Therefore, lottery games with more special symbols can be executed within a predetermined period of time, and the probability that a player will receive a big win within the predetermined period of time can be increased. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently.

Further, even in the configuration in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed at the same time and the lottery game is executed, when the jackpot game occurs in one of the first or second special symbols, the other symbol is displayed. Since the variable display of the special symbols is stopped, the player can play the game while concentrating on the big winning game.

In addition, in this embodiment, when either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a symbol indicating a big win (big winning symbol) or a small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the other special symbol is forcibly displayed. Although it is constituted so as to be stopped and displayed in the lost pattern, it is not limited to this, and the other special pattern is temporarily stopped or variably displayed in a state where the measurement of the fluctuation time is interrupted according to the type of the big win or the type of the small win. Configure. By configuring in this way, the temporarily stopped special symbols are stopped in a display mode or a notification mode in which the player can understand that the temporary stop is being performed, so that the player can stop the lottery game that was in the middle of the variable display. It can be grasped that it is not extinguished, and the big winning game can be played with peace of mind.

Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the start winning process (S105), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process (S105). In the starting winning process (S105 in FIG. 45), it is determined whether the ball has entered (starting winning) any one of the upper first ball entrance 64b1, the lower first ball entrance 64b2, and the second ball entrance 640. , In the case of starting winning, up to the upper limit number of holds (up to 4 in total for the upper first ball entrance 64b1 and lower first ball entrance 64b2, maximum 4 for the second ball entrance 640), each acquired This is a process of storing the counter value in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b.

Further, when each counter value obtained based on the reserved ball is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Or, based on each counter value stored in each of the second special symbol reserved ball storage areas 203b, a process (so-called pre-reading process) of predicting the result of determination in advance, the variation pattern to be selected, etc. is executed. . The starting winning process (S105 in FIG. 45) will be described below.

In the starting winning process (S105 in FIG. 45), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the first starting opening, that is, the upper first ball entrance 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance 64b2 (starting winning). (S1701). Here, entry of a ball into a ball detection switch (not shown) provided in the upper first ball entrance 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance 64b2 is detected. It is determined that the ball entered the upper first ball entrance 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance 64b2 (there was a start winning) (S1701: Yes), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (N1 ) is acquired (S1702), and it is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1703).

In other words, is the number of reserved balls for the upper first ball entrance 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance 64b2 at the present time less than the upper limit of 4 (that is, is the number of reserved balls stored up to the upper limit? ) is determined. When it is determined that the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1703: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (1704), and the voice lamp control device 113 To set a reservation number command for notifying the reservation number of the first start port (lottery right reservation number of the first special symbol) (S1705).

Then, each value of various counter values (first per random number counter C1, first per type counter C2, variation type counter CS1) is read out (acquired) from the counter buffer, and the first special symbol reserved ball execution area of RAM 203 Each is reserved (stored) in the storage area for the number of reserved balls corresponding to 203a (S1706).

Next, a first prefetch process is executed (S1707). This first look-ahead processing (S1707) will be described later with reference to FIG. , a process for discriminating the stop type and the like is executed. In addition, in the present embodiment, it is configured to execute a process for determining the result of determination, the determined variation pattern, the stop type, etc. based on each counter value newly stored, but this is not the only option. Without, for example, when there is a new start winning prize, the result of winning or not determination for all the reserved memories stored (stored) in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the determined fluctuation pattern, It may be configured to execute a process of determining the stop type or the like.

Further, in this embodiment, when new information (winning information) is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, that is, when the lottery right of the first special symbol is newly acquired, the first special symbol Although it is configured to determine the contents of the lottery right (winning information) in advance, without being limited to this, when the lottery right for the first special design is newly acquired, the lottery right for the second special design (winning information ) may be determined in advance.

After the processing of S1707 is executed, the processing of S1708 is executed next. Further, if it is determined in the process of S1701 that the ball has not entered the upper first ball entrance 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance 64b2 (S1701: No), or in the process of S1703, the upper ball is currently When it is determined that the number of reserved balls for the 1st ball entrance 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance 64b2 is the upper limit value (S1703: No), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is added. is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1708.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is added, the first look-ahead processing (S1707) based on the information (winning information) on the added winning is performed. However, without being limited to this, for example, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is the upper limit number (4) in the process of S1703 (S1703 : No), that is, when a ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64 while the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit, the first look-ahead process (S1707) can be executed. It may be configured so that As a result, even in a state where the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit, the player can continue to play the game in order to execute the look-ahead process. Also, when the ball is entered into the upper first ball entrance 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance 64b2 in a state where the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit, it is possible to add value. Therefore, when the ball enters the upper first ball entrance 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance 64b2 in a state where the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol reaches the upper limit, the motivation to play is reduced. can be suppressed.

Next, for each process from S1708 to S1714, the winning of the ball to the first starting hole (upper first ball entrance 64b1 or lower first ball entrance 64b2) executed in each process from S1701 to S1707 is determined. The only difference is that the same processing as the processing performed on the second ball entrance 640 is the processing performed on the second ball entrance 640, so detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, in this embodiment, since it is configured so that a small hit can be won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is also acquired in the process of S1713.

Next, referring to FIG. 46, the first look-ahead process (S1707), which is one process of the starting winning process (S105 in FIG. 45), will be described. FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing this first prefetching process (S1707).

In the first look-ahead process (S1707 in FIG. 46), first, various counter values from the storage area newly stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area 203a, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2 , each value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is read (S1821). Then, the read data is stored in the area with the lowest winning order among the free storage areas in the prefetching reserve storage area (S1822).

Then, if it is determined that the determination result in the processing of S1823 is a jackpot (jackpot only in the low probability state, jackpot only in the high probability state, jackpot in both the low probability state and the high probability state) (S1823: Yes), the jackpot A winning condition (game state set at the time of lottery) and a first winning command indicating the jackpot type in the event of winning are set (S1824), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the determination result in the processing of S1823 is not a big hit (the special symbol is out even in a high probability state or a low probability state) (S1823: No), the first winning command indicating the loss is set. (S1825), this processing ends.

Here, the first prize winning command set in the process of S1824 or S1825 includes, in addition to the above-described information for indicating the success/failure determination result (information that has a different meaning based on the success/failure determination result), common information: The setting includes information for indicating the values of various counter values read by the processing of S1821. Then, the winning command set in this process is output to the sound lamp controller 113 by the external output process (S2401) executed in the main process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 52).

On the voice lamp control device 113 side, when the winning command is received, the display mode of the pending ball is varied based on various information included in the winning command (for example, the color of the pending ball is changed to a color different from usual). It is possible to execute an effect (pre-reading effect) in which a notice pattern or the like is displayed before the start of the fluctuation to suggest the result of the determination to the player.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, when executing the look-ahead process, the determination result of the case of the high probability state of the special design, the determination result of the case of the low probability state of the special design is determined, the result of each determination However, without being limited to this, for example, even if the special symbol is in a high probability state or a low probability state, the determination value that is determined to be a big hit ( The value of the first winning random number counter C1) may be defined, and a winning command indicating a special symbol jackpot may be set only when the determination value is read.

By configuring in this way, only when it is determined in advance that it is a specific jackpot to the audio lamp control device 113 side, a winning command indicating a jackpot is output, so a special symbol that does not execute a look-ahead effect It is possible to give a feeling of expectation of winning a jackpot against the fluctuation.

Furthermore, the game state when the special symbol lottery based on the reservation memory (winning information) stored (stored) in the first special symbol reservation storage area 203a is accurately discriminated, and based on the game state It may be configured so as to execute the suitability determination. In this case, instead of changing the selection of the variation pattern depending on the number of retained balls, it is possible to determine by selecting a constant variation pattern regardless of the number of retained balls at the start of variation. When the look-ahead is executed, the game state at the time of start of variation can be determined by determining the variation order until the variation of the retained ball starts based on the information retained and stored.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a new reserved storage (winning information) is stored (stored) in the first special symbol reserved storage area 203a, the prefetching process based on the winning information is executed, and during the prefetching process , but not limited to this, in the pre-reading process of the main control device 110, the winning information newly stored (stored) in the first special symbol reservation storage area 203a ( Information indicating the content (each counter value) of the pending memory) may be set as a winning command, and the result of winning/failing determination may be predicted based on the information included in the winning command received by the audio lamp control device 113 side. good.

With this configuration, the processing load on main controller 110 can be reduced. In addition, on the audio lamp control device 113 side, a process for determining whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect is executed, and when it is determined to execute the look-ahead effect, the information included in the winning command received from the main control device 110 It is preferable to configure it so as to perform analysis (prediction of acceptance/rejection determination result). As a result, when the look-ahead performance is not performed, the specific look-ahead processing (prediction of the success/failure determination result) is not performed, so that the Pachinko machine 10 can be prevented from performing useless control. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from illegally obtaining the result of the prefetching process executed without a title.

Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the second look-ahead process (S1714), which is one process of the starting winning process (S105 in FIG. 46), will be described. FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing this second prefetch processing (S1714). The second look-ahead process (S1714 in FIG. 47) is performed by performing the above-described first look-ahead process (S1707 in FIG. 46) when the ball enters the first starting hole (upper first ball entrance 64b1 or lower first ball entrance 64b2). In contrast to the process of making various judgments by pre-discriminating (pre-reading) the pending data (winning information) based on the ball (starting winning), the object to be judged is the first starting gate. The only difference is that the winning information is changed from the winning information based on the fact to the winning information based on the starting winning at the second start opening (second ball opening 640). detailed description is omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 48, the normal symbol variation process (S106), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). The normal symbol variation process (S106) is a process for controlling the variable display of the second symbol (normal symbol), the opening time of the electric accessory 64a, and the like.

In the normal symbol variation process (S106 in FIG. 48), first, it is determined whether or not the current normal symbol (second symbol) is hitting (S2001). During the winning of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 64a is performed at the maximum after the second symbol display device 83 displays the winning (after the winning symbol is stopped and displayed). Until the middle (until the winning game is completed) is included. When it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is in the process of winning (S2001: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hitting (S2001: No), it is determined whether or not the normal symbol of the second symbol display device 83 is being variably displayed (S2002). When it is determined that the normal symbol variation is not being displayed, that is, it is in a state where a new normal symbol variation (lottery) can be executed (S2002: No), next, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f A value (M) is acquired (S2003), and it is determined whether the value is greater than 0 (S2004).

When it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 in the processing of S2004 (S2004: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S2004: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S2005). In other words, when it is determined that the condition for executing a new normal symbol variation in the process of S2004 (that winning information for use in the normal symbol variation is retained and stored) is established, it is retained and stored. 1 is subtracted from the value of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f in order to execute the normal design variation using the winning prize information.

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S2006). In the process of S2006, the data stored in the normal design reservation 1 to the normal design reservation 4 of the normal design reservation ball storage area 203c are shifted in order to the execution area side. More specifically, normal design reservation 1 → execution area, normal design reservation 2 → normal design reservation 1, normal design reservation 3 → normal design reservation 2, normal design reservation 4 → normal design reservation 4, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is acquired (S2007).

Next, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag 203m is ON, that is, whether or not the current state is a normal symbol high probability state (S2008), and when it is determined that the time saving flag 203m is set to ON. (S2008: Yes), based on the hit determination value of the second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 11(c)) for high probability, obtains the result of the win/fail determination (lottery result), and proceeds to the process of S2011. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time saving flag 203m is off (S2008: No), the second hit random number table 202c for low probability (see FIG. 11 (c)) Based on the hit determination value, the success or failure determination result is acquired (S2010), and the process proceeds to S2011.

In the process of S2011, it is determined whether the current normal symbol variation (lottery) is a hit (S2011), and if it is determined to be a hit (S2011: Yes), the display mode of "○" at the time of the hit is displayed. The display mode is set (S2012), and the value of the normal pattern fluctuation type counter is used to determine the normal pattern fluctuation time based on the normal pattern fluctuation pattern (S2014). On the other hand, in the process of S2011, if it is determined that the current normal symbol variation (lottery) is not a win (no) (S2011: No), the display mode of "x" is set as the display mode when losing (S2013), and proceeds to the processing of S2014 described above.

Here, the processing (processing of S2014) for determining the normal pattern fluctuation time will be described using the contents defined in the normal pattern fluctuation pattern table 202f (see FIG. 18). In this embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal design fluctuation, the probability state of the set normal design (high probability state, low probability state), the value of the normal design reservation ball number counter 203f (normal design reservation number), It is configured to be variably set based on Then, the easiness of the ball entering the lower first ball entrance 64b2 is made different depending on the fluctuation time of the set normal symbol.

As described above, the normal pattern variation pattern table 202f (see FIG. 18) defines a variation time of 0.5 seconds when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. Then, when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, a winning game (normal A per-figure game) is executed. Therefore, when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, the game per normal pattern ends before the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 reaches the lower first ball entrance 64b2. can not enter the lower first ball entrance 64b2.

On the other hand, when the low probability state of the normal design is set, different fluctuation time is set according to the number of reserved balls of the normal design (the value of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f), When the number of reserved balls in the normal design is 0, the fluctuation time of the normal design is 30 seconds, and when the number of reserved balls in the normal design is 1 to 3, the normal design. A variation time of 1.4 seconds is defined as the variation time.

Then, when the low probability state of the normal pattern is set, a winning game (normal A per-figure game) is executed. Therefore, when the low probability state of normal symbols is set and the number of reserved balls of normal symbols is 0, the ball passing through the through gate 67 reaches the lower first entrance 64b2 (through gate 67 1.6 seconds after passing), the normal pattern variation (30 seconds variation) is being executed, so the ball cannot enter the lower first ball entrance 64b2. , and when the low probability state of the normal pattern is set and the number of reserved balls of the normal pattern is 1 to 3, when the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 reaches the lower first ball entrance 64b2 ( 1.6 seconds after passing through the through gate 67 ), the normal game is being executed, so the ball is configured to enter the second ball entrance 640 .

In this manner, by varying the degree of entry of the ball into the lower first ball entrance 64b2 according to the length of the fluctuation time of the set normal symbol, the lower first ball entrance 64b2 can be Since the ease with which a ball enters the ball can be easily changed according to the game state, various game characteristics can be created.

Further, as described above, even if the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set shorter than the appropriate range, or if it is set longer, the ball is configured to be difficult to enter the lower first ball entrance 64b2. Therefore, for example, even in a game state (for example, probability variable state) in which it is necessary to shorten the fluctuation time of normal symbols, it is possible to make it difficult for the ball to enter the lower first ball entrance 64b2.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it is configured to set the variation pattern of the normal design according to the game state of the normal design and the number of reserved balls of the normal design. It may be configured so that different fluctuation time is set based on the value of the normal figure fluctuation type counter CS2.

On the other hand, in the process of S2002, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not displayed in a variable manner (S2002: No), the variation time of the normal symbol being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S2015), and if it is determined that the variation time has not elapsed (S2015: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation time has passed in the process of S2015 (S2015: Yes), next, stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S2016). In the process of S2016, when the current normal symbol lottery is a win, the second symbol display device 83 is set to stop display (illuminate display) the "O" symbol. On the other hand, when the lottery for the normal symbol is lost, the second symbol display device 83 stops displaying (lights up) the "x" symbol. That is, a setting is made to stop and display the display mode set in the processing of S2012 or S2013 described above.

When the stop display is set by the process of S2016, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is terminated, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed in the second pattern in the display mode set by the process of S2012 or the process of S2013. The symbol display device 83 stops displaying (lighting display).

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the current normal symbol is a hit (S2017). When it is determined that the lottery result of the current normal symbol is a hit (S2017: Yes), a process for setting the opening/closing control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 64a is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result of the current normal symbol is not a hit (no) (S2017: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, the opening/closing control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 64a in this embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, based on the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol set at the timing of determining whether the normal symbol is correct (timing of performing the processing of S2008 to S2011) Probability of normal symbols set at the timing (timing determined that the variation time has passed in the processing of S2015) to set the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 64a by executing the judgment of normal symbols. It is configured to set the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 64a based on the state (high-probability state, low-probability state).

That is, in the present embodiment, the variation processing (lottery processing) for normal symbols and the variation processing (lottery processing) for special symbols are configured to be executed independently, and further, the variation processing for special symbols ( It is configured so that the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal design is variable based on the result of the lottery process). Therefore, depending on the result of the variation processing (lottery processing) regarding the special symbols that is executed in parallel during the period when the variation processing (lottery processing) regarding the normal symbols is performed, the normal symbols are usually at the timing of judging whether the symbols is set, and at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 64a, there is a case where the normal symbol low probability state is set.

In such a situation, for example, the opening control mode (open pattern) is set, the electric accessory 64a is long open in a state where the low probability state of normal symbols is set (an open pattern executed when the high probability state of normal symbols is set ) was a problem.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 64a is determined, and based on the determination result, the electric role It is configured to set the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the object 64a. As a result, the electric accessory 64a can be opened in an opening pattern according to the set game state.

In the process of S2017, if it is determined that the lottery result of the current normal symbol is a win (S2017: Yes), then the probability state of the current normal symbol (high probability state, low probability state) is determined. Then, it is determined whether the time saving flag 203m is on (S2018), and if it is determined that the time saving flag 203m is not on (is off), that is, the current state is a normal symbol low probability state (S2018: No), as the open pattern for the normal symbol low probability state, set the open pattern "0.7 seconds × 1 time" to execute the open once for 0.7 seconds (S2019).

On the other hand, in the process of S2018, if it is determined that the time saving flag 203m is set to ON (S2018: Yes), as the opening pattern for the high probability state of the normal symbol, the opening for 0.8 seconds is executed once The release pattern "0.8 sec x 1 time" is set (S2020). That is, in the present embodiment, the open pattern for the high probability state of the normal symbol (0.8 seconds × 1 time) is higher than the open pattern for the low probability state of the normal symbol (0.7 seconds × 1 time). , to open the electric accessory 64a for a long period of time. Therefore, as the opening pattern of the electric accessory 64a, a winning game (lower The period in which the first ball entrance 64b2 is in the open state is lengthened).

Next, based on the opening pattern set in the process of S2019 or S2020, the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory 64a is set (S2021), and this process ends.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the normal design propriety determination is executed based on the probability state of the normal symbol at the timing of performing the normal symbol propriety determination, and the opening control mode of the electric accessory 64a to be moved in the normal symbol winning game. Although it is configured to set the opening pattern of the electric accessory 64a based on the probability state of the normal symbol at the timing of setting (opening pattern), it is not limited to this, for example, the normal symbol is determined. A high-probability state of normal symbols is set at the timing, and a high-probability state of normal symbols is set at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 64a to be moved in the winning game of the normal symbols. The electric accessory 64a may be configured to be opened for a long time only when the electric accessory 64a is open, or the opening pattern of the electric accessory 64a may be set based on the game state set at the timing of judging whether the normal symbol is correct or not. It may be configured to set

Thus, in this embodiment, the normal pattern fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is determined from the normal pattern fluctuation pattern table 202f (see FIG. 18) based on the value of the normal pattern fluctuation type counter CS2. As shown in FIG. 18, in the normal symbol variation pattern table 202f, the normal symbol variation pattern is set corresponding to each game state and the number of retained balls of the normal symbol. Other than the probability variation state (probability variation: with electric sapo), there is one type of variation pattern, and the same variation time is always determined regardless of the value of the selected general figure variation type counter.

Next, referring to FIG. 49, the through gate passage processing executed in the first embodiment is executed (S107). This process is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28) to determine whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, and if the ball has passed, the second hit. This is a process for acquiring the value indicated by the random number counter C4 and storing it in the execution area.

In the through-gate passing process (S107 in FIG. 49), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 (S2101). Here, the passage of the ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 (S2101: Yes), next, it is determined whether the currently set game state is the normal state (S2102), If it is determined that it is in the normal state (S2002: Yes), since it is a case where the right-handed game is performed in the state where the normal state is set, a notification command for indicating the firing abnormality is set (S2103) , S2106.

When the notification command set by the processing of S2103 is output (notified) to the sound lamp control device 113, the abnormality notification processing is executed on the sound lamp control device 113 side, and the third symbol display device 81 detects the firing abnormality. (not shown) is displayed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the current game state is not a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) in the processing of S2102 (S2102: No), next, the current game state is latent. It is determined whether it is in a definite state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) (S2104), and if it is determined that it is a latent definite state (S2104: Yes), the second notification indicating firing abnormality A command is set (S2105), and the process proceeds to S2106. If it is determined in the process of S2104 that it is not in the variable probability state (it is in the latent probability state) (S2104: No), the process proceeds directly to S2106.

Here, when the second notification command set by the processing of S2105 is output (notified) to the sound lamp control device 113, the abnormality notification processing is executed on the sound lamp control device 113 side, and the third symbol display device 81 , a second abnormality notification mode (not shown) indicating a firing abnormality is displayed.

In this way, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, it is determined whether or not the right-handed game is being performed by configuring to determine that the right-handed game is being performed. (For example, a sensor for detecting that the shot ball has reached the game area beyond the variable display unit 80) is no longer required, so the manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, by setting the notification command for indicating the firing abnormality differently according to the game state set at the time when the right-handed game is played, it is possible to easily display different abnormality notification modes. can.

In this embodiment, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, it is determined that the right-handed game is being executed. For example, a detection means for detecting that the operation handle 51 has been operated with an intensity (manipulation amount) sufficient to shoot a ball into the right-handed area. may be provided.

Returning to FIG. 51, the description continues. After completing the processing of S2103 to S2105, the processing of S2106 is executed next. In S2106, the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is acquired, and then whether the acquired value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 4 (normal symbol reserved ball number has reached the upper limit) (S2107).

In the process of S2107, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is larger than 4 (the upper limit is 4) (S2107: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not greater than 4 (3 or less) (S2107: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f 1 is added (S2108), the normal pattern reserved ball number command (command for indicating the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203f) is set (S2109), and the value of the second per random number counter C4 is set to normal It is stored in the symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S2110), and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 50, NMI interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information (S2201), and ends the NMI interruption processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout launch control device 111 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by such NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 51, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing this startup process.

This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process (FIG. 51), first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S2301). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a wait process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S2302). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S2303).

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 4) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S2304), and if it is turned on (S2304: Yes), the process proceeds to S2312. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S2304: No), it is further determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2305), and if not stored (S2305: No). , there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally, so in this case also, the process proceeds to S2312.

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2305: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S2306). If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power shutdown, the backed-up data is destroyed. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203 . Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S2312, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S2312). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing of RAM 203 (S2313, S2314).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM 203 is initialized (S2313, S2314).

Similarly, when power failure occurrence information is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S2313, S2314) is executed. . In the RAM initialization process (S2313, S2314), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S2313), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S2314). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S2310.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S2304: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S2305: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S2307: Yes), while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held, the power failure occurrence information is cleared (S2308). Next, the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) transmits a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning to the game state at the time of drive power interruption (S2309), and the process proceeds to S2310. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the sound lamp control device 113 (S2310). After that, the interrupt is permitted (S2311). Then, the process shifts to the main process, which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 52, main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the start-up processing described above will be described. FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing this main process. This main process is roughly divided into a counter update process and a power-off process.

In the main process (see FIG. 52), first, in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 29), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 is transmitted to each control on the sub side. External output processing for transmission to the device (peripheral control device) is executed (S2401). Specifically, the presence or absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 29) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, a prize corresponding to the number of won balls is sent to the payout control device 111. Send a sphere command. In addition, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 29) and the start winning process (see FIG. 45). Furthermore, by this external output processing (S2401 in FIG. 52), various commands set by various processing of the main control device 110 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and various commands displayed on the third symbol display device 81 Information for setting effects (variation effects, decorative effects, etc.). Also, the opening command, round number command, and ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 53) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . In addition, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch control device 112 when the ball is to be launched.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S2402). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is finished, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S2403), and then in the case of a special symbol jackpot state, the sound lamp control device 113 A command setting for executing a jackpot effect and a jackpot control process for opening or closing the left variable winning device 65 and the right variable winning device 650 are executed (S2404).

Details of the jackpot control processing (S2404) will be described later with reference to FIGS. The device 650 (hereinafter referred to as the winning opening, etc.) is opened, and the maximum opening time of the winning opening, etc. (left variable winning device 65, right variable winning device 650) has elapsed, or the winning opening, etc. (left variable winning device 65 , right variable winning device 650) determines whether or not a specified number of balls have won. When any of these conditions are established, the winning openings (the left variable winning device 65 and the right variable winning device 650) are closed. Opening and closing of the winning openings (the left variable winning device 65 and the right variable winning device 650) are repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In addition, in this embodiment, although the jackpot control process (S2404) is executed in the main process, it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, a small winning control process relating to a small winning game which is executed when a small winning is won in a special symbol lottery is executed (S2405). In this small winning control process (S2405), a predetermined scenario ( A process for setting based on a small winning scenario) is executed. Details of the small winning control process (S2405) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the electric accessary product opening/closing process for controlling the opening/closing of the electric accessary product 64a associated with the lower first entrance 64b2 is executed (S2406). In the electric accessary product opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric accessary product is set by the processing of S2021 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 48), the opening/closing control of the electric accessary product is started. The open/close control of the electric accessory is continued until the period set by the processing of S2019 and the processing of S2020 in the normal symbol variation processing is completed.

Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S2407). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the first special symbol variation start process (S210 in FIG. 30) or the second special symbol variation start process (S212 in FIG. 36), according to the variation pattern Then, the variable display is started in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, from the start of the variation until the variation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off and the green LED is turned on. If the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned on. is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

Note that the main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED change the lighting color of That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Also, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 30) or the second special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 36) has ended , the variation display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is terminated, and the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing (S307 in FIG. 36) is performed by the first special symbol variation stop processing (see S207 in FIG. 34). ), the stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped (lighted up) on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B in the display mode set in S507. As for the second special symbol, the stop symbol (first symbol) is stop-displayed (lighted-up) on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B by the same processing.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when one of the special symbols is stopped and displayed in a display mode (jackpot pattern) indicating a big win, the other special pattern is stopped and displayed in a display mode (outgoing pattern) indicating a loss. A stop display for that purpose is also performed.

Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S2408). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S2014 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 48), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device. As a result, in the second pattern display device, a variable display is performed in which the second pattern "O" pattern and the "X" pattern are alternately lit. Also, in the second symbol display update process (S2408), when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S2016 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 48), it is executed in the second symbol display device. Ending the variation display, and in the display mode set by the processing of S2012 or S2013 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 48), the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device ( display).

After that, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2409). SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (S2410). If the predetermined time has already passed (S2410: Yes), the process proceeds to S2401, and the above-described processes after S2401 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the main processing this time (S2410: No), the second main processing is executed until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S2411, S2412).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S2411). Specifically, 1 is added to the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479, 232 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the change type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S2411 (S2412). In addition, in the process of this S2412, the value of the normal figure fluctuation classification counter CS2 is also updated like the value of fluctuation classification counter CS1.

Here, since the execution time of each process of S2401 to S2408 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , the initial value of the first per random number counter C1, the initial value of the second per random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and the values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the general figure fluctuation type counter CS2 are also randomly updated. can do. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the processing contents for updating the judgment value related to the lottery of special symbols and normal symbols, and it is possible to prevent the execution of fraudulent games aiming at the timing when the judgment value corresponding to the win is acquired. can be suppressed.

In addition, in the process of S2409, if information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S2409: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 50 has been executed, so the power-off process after S2413 is executed. First, to prohibit the occurrence of each interrupt processing (S2413), to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as payout control device 111 and sound lamp control device 113) power off command indicating that the power has been cut off and transmit (S2414). Then, a RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is stored (S2415), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S2416), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203 .

It should be noted that the processing of S2409 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S2401 to S2408, or at the timing of the end of one cycle of the processing of S2411 and S2412 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. It can start from the processing of S2401. That is, the process can be started from the process of S2401, as in the case of initialization in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process at power-off, the stack pointer is By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the processing can be started from S2401. Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S2404) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process (S2404). This jackpot control process (S2404) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a special pattern jackpot state, information for executing various effects according to the jackpot. It is a process for setting (command) and opening or closing a winning opening (specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a, V winning opening 650a).

In the jackpot control process (S2404), first, it is determined whether it is time to start the jackpot of the special symbol (S2501). Specifically, S809 of the first special symbol variation stop processing (see S207 in FIG. 38) or S1509 of the second special symbol variation stop processing (see FIG. 45) is executed, and the start of the special symbol jackpot is set. If so, it is determined that a special symbol jackpot is started. In the processing of S2501, when it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is the start timing (S2501: Yes), an opening command is set (S2502), and this processing ends.

It should be noted that the opening command may be configured to be delayed (variable) and transmitted according to the gaming state and the jackpot type. Specifically, an opening counter that is periodically updated (every 4 ms) is provided. Then, when a special symbol jackpot or a small hit is started, the opening counter is initialized to 0, and then the opening counter reaches a predetermined value (for example, 2500 for jackpot A and 5000 for jackpot B). When it becomes so, an opening command may be transmitted. By doing so, for example, when a big win is achieved in the left-handed game, the time until the start of the big win is lengthened, and when a big win is achieved in the right-handed game, the time until the start of the big win is lengthened. can be shortened. In this embodiment, when the jackpot is hit during the left-handed game, it is necessary to switch to the right-handed game as the jackpot game. According to the above configuration, it is possible to sufficiently secure the time to switch to the right-handed game (jackpot game) when the left-handed game results in a big hit. As a result, the operation burden on the player can be reduced.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2501, if it is determined that it is not the special symbol jackpot start timing (S2501: No), then it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is currently in progress (S2503). In the processing of this S2503, determination is performed by reading the game information relating to the winning game stored in the game state storage area 203k.

During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S2503, if it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (S2503: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S2503: Yes), then it is determined whether it is time to start a new round (S2504).

When it is determined that it is time to start a new round in the process of S2504 (S2504: Yes), a big hit operation setting process is executed (S2505). Details of this jackpot action setting process (S2505) will be described with reference to FIG. operation processing of the member 650h) is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 54, the jackpot operation setting process (S2505), which is one process in the jackpot control process (S2404 in FIG. 53), will be described. FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot operation setting process (S2505).

When the jackpot operation setting process (S1625) is executed, first, among the opening operation scenarios set corresponding to the current jackpot, the opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot to be started this time is set. An operation scenario is read (S2641). Then, the opening operation of the flow path solenoid (probability variable solenoid) 650k (see FIG. 4) is set based on the data read in S2641 (S2642). Next, the opening operation of the opening/closing door 65f1 of the left variable winning device 65 or the opening/closing door 650f1 of the V winning opening 650a is set by the data read in the process of S2641 (S2643). After that, this process is terminated.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is a jackpot game (round game) that executes an opening operation for the first attacker (right variable winning device 650) as a jackpot game, and a second attacker (variable winning device 65). On the other hand, it is configured to be able to execute a jackpot game (round game) that executes an opening action, and the processing of S2642 described above is performed in the round game that opens the first attacker (right variable winning device 650). It is defined only in the opening action scenario corresponding to the first round of the round game. Therefore, when executing a round game other than that, a scenario of opening the flow path solenoid (probability variable solenoid) 650k in the corresponding opening operation scenario (scenario of moving the switching member 650h and communicating the special discharge flow path 650e2) is not specified, the process of S2642 is skipped.

In this way, each operation of the variable prize winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, so even if an unexpected power failure occurs during the big win game, the big win game will end in the middle. Defects can be suppressed. Further, although detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that it is time to start a new round (S2504 in FIG. 55: Yes), a round for indicating that a new round game is to be executed Configure the command to be set. The round command set here is output to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 side is configured to be able to determine the progress of the jackpot game being executed. Therefore, based on the round command received from the main control device 110, it is possible to display in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 what round the game is currently in.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as the round command set by the main controller 110, a round command including information indicating the number of rounds of the round game to be executed is set. Instead, it may be configured to set a round command including only information indicating that the round game has been newly started. In this case, means for measuring the number of round commands received during one jackpot game is provided on the side of the voice ramp control device 113, and the number of rounds of the round game to be executed this time is provided on the side of the voice ramp control device 113. may be calculated, and the display mode of the number of rounds displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be set based on the calculation result. By configuring in this way, the amount of information included in the round command set by main controller 110 can be reduced, so that the load on main controller 110 can be reduced.

Returning to FIG. 55, the description continues. In the process of S2504, if it is determined that it is not the time to start a new round (S2504: No), it is determined whether it is time to operate the opening/closing door 650f1 (S2506). If it is determined that it is time to operate (S2506: Yes), the open solenoid 650f2 is turned on (S2507). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2506, when it is determined that it is not the timing of the opening operation (S2506: No), it is determined whether it is the timing of starting the ending effect (S2509). The start timing of the ending production is the final round of the jackpot game (the second round in the case of jackpot A) is completed, the open/close door 650f1 is closed, and the waiting time (in this embodiment, , 3 seconds) has elapsed, it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect. When it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect (S2509: Yes), an ending command indicating the start of the ending is set (S2510), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2509, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S2509: No), then it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the jackpot (S2511). It should be noted that the end timing of the jackpot is, specifically, the end timing of the set ending effect. In the processing of S2511, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the jackpot (end timing of the ending effect) (S2511: Yes), the jackpot end processing for setting the end of the jackpot is executed (S2512), and this processing exit. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the time to finish the jackpot (S2511), the process ends.

Next, details of the jackpot ending process (S2512) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing the content of the jackpot ending process (S2512). In this jackpot end processing (S2512), the value of the probability variable number counter is updated, and a high probability state of special symbols is set according to the jackpot type that is won, or a high probability state of normal symbols is set based on the jackpot type that is won. is executed.

When the jackpot end process (S2512) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation number counter 203h is 3 (S2701). When it is determined that the value of the probability variable number counter 203h is 3 or more (S2701: Yes), since the probability variable number is the upper limit of 3, the probability variable flag 203g and the time saving flag 203m are set to off (S2702), and the probability variable The value of the number counter 203h is reset (S2703). Then, a command indicating a change in the game state is set (S2709), and this process is terminated.

In this embodiment, the variable probability state or the latent probability state is set up to three times after the jackpot game ends, and when the number of times reaches three, the game state changes to the normal state. By constructing in this way, there is an effect that the player can enjoy the probability variation up to three times or the latent probability game with peace of mind. In addition, in this embodiment, although the probability variation frequency is configured to be up to 3 times, it is not limited to this and may be configured to be 5 times or to be updated at random. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a wide variety of playability.

On the other hand, in the process of S2701, if it is determined that the value of the probability variation number counter 203h is not 3 (that is, it is 2 or less), it is not the timing at which the probability variation ends, so the value of the probability variation number counter 203h is added by 1 (S2704). Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type won this time is A (S2705). If it is determined that the jackpot type this time is A (S2705: Yes), in order to set the probability variable state as the gaming state, the time saving flag 203m and the probability variable flag 203g are set to ON (S2706), and the above S2709 Execute the process and terminate this process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot type is not A (S2705: No), the time saving flag 203m is set to off (S2707), and the probability variation flag 203g is set to on ( S2708). Then, the process of S2709 described above is executed, and this process ends.

Next, the small hit control process (S2405) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 56 is a flow chart showing this small winning control process (S2405). This small hit control process (S2405) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 32), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a state of a special symbol small win, various effects corresponding to the small win are executed. It is processing for setting information (command) and opening or closing the right variable winning device 650 .

In the small hit control process (S2405), first, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the small hit (S2801). When it is the timing of the small hit start (S2801: Yes), the small hit opening command is set (S2802), and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the time to start the small hit (S2801: No), it is determined whether or not it is during the small hit (S2803). If it is determined that it is not during the small hit (S2803: Yes), there is no need to execute control for the small hit, so this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the small winning is in progress (S2803: Yes), it is determined whether or not it is time to open the right variable winning device 650 (S2804). If it is determined that it is time for the opening operation (S2804: Yes), the opening solenoid is set to ON (S2805), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the timing of the opening operation (S2804: No), it is determined whether it is the timing of ending the small hit (S2806). When it is determined that it is time to end the small hit (S2806: Yes), the small hit flag 203x is set to OFF (S2807), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the time to end the small hit (S2806: No), this process is terminated.

<Regarding control processing executed by the sound ramp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 71. FIG. The processing of the MPU 221 can be broadly classified into startup processing that is started upon power-on and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, referring to FIG. 57, start-up processing executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 57 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S4001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing in S4116 (see FIG. 58) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure"). ) is started during execution (S4002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 58, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives power-off occurrence information from the main control device 110 (see S4113 in FIG. 58), it executes power-off processing in S4116. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S4116 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in-progress flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S4002: No), the startup process this time was started after the power was completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the power was shut off in S4116. Either it was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise (without receiving a power off command from the main controller 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S4006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), it will transfer to S4004 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process proceeds to S4008.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). from), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S4116 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the operation is started with the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S4003: No), and the process proceeds to S4008.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S4002: Yes), the startup process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during execution of the power-off process in S4117, the sound lamp control device 113 It is started by resetting the MPU 221 of . In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S4004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S4004, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (S4004). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to confirm whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". All storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0 by this read/write check of the RAM 223 .

If it is determined that the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S4006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S4005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S4007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. Abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be

In the process of S4008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S4008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S4117 is executed (see S4116 in FIG. 58). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S4116 is executed, the process of S4008 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the startup processing this time is instantaneous. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S4116 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S4009), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S4010), and then , interrupt permission is set (S4011), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S4008 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the current start-up process was started after the power supply was completely shut off, for example. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), S4009, which is processing for clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4010 to set the initial value of the RAM 223 (S4010).

The reason why the clearing process of S4009 is skipped is that when the process of S4008 is reached from S4004 via the process of S4006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S4004, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 58, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has passed since the main process was started or since the process of S4101 was last executed (S4101). If it has not passed (S4101: No), the process proceeds to S4111 without performing the processes of S4102 to S4110. In the processing of S4101, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond has passed because S4102 to S4110 are processing related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). , S4111 and the variable display setting process of S4112 are preferably executed in a short cycle. By executing the process of S4111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the process of S4111 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Based on this, the setting regarding the variable display effect can be performed without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S4101 (S4101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S4103 to S4113 are sent to the display control device 114. Output processing is executed (S4102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S4108 described later (S4103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S4104). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S4105 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S4105, a customer waiting effect is executed, and then the pending number display update process is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting effect, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, a setting such as switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to a title screen is performed, and the setting is a command in the display control device. 114.

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S4107). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed is monitored in order to enhance the effect of the effect, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is the process of setting to perform production. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command is set to notify the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing is finished, the lamp editing processing is executed (S4108), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of S4109, liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S4110). After that, the process proceeds to S4111. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. Lamp edit processing of S4108 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring processing. It should be noted that the sound editing/output processing of S4109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

After the processing of S4110, command determination processing (S4111) for performing processing according to the command received from the main controller 110 is executed, and the processing shifts to S4112. The details of this command determination process (S4111) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S4112, in order to display a variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81, a variable pattern command for display is generated based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110, and the command is sent to the display controller 114. Executes a variable display setting process, which is a process for setting to transmit to. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the process of S4112 is finished, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4113). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S4113 (S4113: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S4115), and the power-off processing is executed (S4116). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned off (S4117), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S4113 (S4113: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4114), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4114: No), the process returns to S4101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4114: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes. Here, since the main processing is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, the command determination process (S4111) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S4111). This command determination process (S4111) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 62) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main controller 110. . Details of the command determination process (S4111) will be described below.

In the command determination process (S4111), first, from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read out and analyzed. It is determined whether or not a 1 variation pattern command has been received (S4201). Here, the special figure 1 variation pattern command is a command for notifying the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol. In the process of S4201, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variation pattern command is received (S4201: Yes), the special figure 1 variation start process is executed (S4202), and this process ends. Details of this special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S4202) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S4201, if it is determined that the special figure 1 variation pattern command is not received (S4201: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 (S4203). In addition, the special figure 2 variation pattern command is a command for notifying the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol.

In the processing of S4203, when it is determined that the special figure 2 variation pattern command is received (S4203: Yes), special figure 2 variation start processing provided in the RAM 223 is executed (S4204), and this processing ends. The details of this special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S4204) will be described later with reference to FIG. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 in a format that allows identification of the variation pattern type of the second special symbol, and in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 71) described later. , When notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variable display effect of the second special symbol and the display mode of the variable display effect of the second special symbol (setting the variable pattern command for the display of the second special symbol used).

In the process of S4203, if it is determined that the special figure 2 variation pattern command has not been received (S4203: No), then whether the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command has been received (S4205). If it is determined that either the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command is received (S4205: Yes), the stop type command reception process is executed (S4206) and this process ends. The details of this stop type command reception process (S4206) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S4205, if it is determined that neither the special figure 1 stop type command nor the special figure 2 stop type command is received (S4205: No), whether the number of pending balls command is received from the main controller 110 It discriminates (S4207). Here, if it is determined that the pending ball number command has been received (S4207: Yes), the pending ball number process (S4208) is executed, and this process ends. Details of the pending ball number processing (S4208) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Also, in the processing of S4207, if it is determined that the reserved ball number command has not been received (S4207: No), it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4209). In the processing of S4209, if it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S4209: Yes), the information of the winning information command received this time is set in the corresponding winning information storage area 223b (S4210), and this processing ends. .

In the processing of S4209, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S4209: No), then it is determined whether or not the status command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4211). If it is determined that a status command has been received (S4211: Yes), status command reception processing is executed (S4212), and this processing ends. Details of this state command reception processing (S4212) will be described later with reference to FIG. A certain state) and a process of setting a winning gaming state (middle winning, small winning) in the subordinate state setting area 223k is executed.

Next, in the process of S4211, if it is determined that the state command has not been received (S4211: No), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation stop related command has been received (S4213). If it is determined in the processing of S4213 that the command related to fluctuation stop has been received (S4213), the fluctuation stop processing is executed (S4214), and this processing ends. A detailed description of this fluctuation stop processing (S4214) will be given later with reference to FIG. And processing for setting the display mode of the variable effect using the fourth symbol is executed.

In this embodiment, as the period during which the special symbol variation display is executed, the variation pattern (variation time) is set in advance when performing the special symbol variation, but the preset variation pattern Even in the midst of executing the special design variation based on, there is a case where the process of forcibly stopping the special design variation is executed according to the result of other special design variation. Therefore, the fluctuation stop processing (S4214) is executed on the side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the fluctuation display (variation effect) of the third and fourth designs can be stopped in correspondence with the timing when the special design fluctuation is stopped. It is configured so that As a result, it is possible to synchronize the fluctuation state of the special symbols and the situation of the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and to provide the player with an easy-to-understand display mode.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4213 that the variable stop related command has not been received (S4213: No), it is determined whether or not the temporary stop related command has been received (S4215). If so (S4215: Yes), temporary stop related processing is executed (S4216), and this processing ends. Details of the temporary stop related processing (S4216) will be described later with reference to FIG. It performs processing for causing the third pattern display device 81 to execute.

In the processing of S4215, if it is determined that the temporary stop related command has not been received (S4215: No), it is determined whether the winning related command has been received (S4217), and if it is determined that the winning related command has been received (S4217: Yes), hit-related processing is executed (S4218), and this processing ends. The details of the hit-related process (S4218) will be described later with reference to FIG. 68. As a result of the lottery of the special symbols, the effect corresponding to the big hit game or the small hit game executed when the big hit or the small hit is won. It performs processing for causing the third symbol display device 81 to perform display.

In the processing of S4217, if it is determined that the win-related command has not been received (S4217: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S4219), and this processing ends. In the process of S4220, if the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, the process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is processed. to the display control device 114 .

The command determination processing (S4111 in FIG. 59) executed by the sound lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment has been described above. , An order other than the order shown in the present embodiment may be used, for example, the process of determining whether or not a state command is received, either the special figure 1 variation pattern command or the special figure 2 variation pattern command The determination order may be defined so that it is executed before the process of determining whether or not it has been received.

By configuring in this way, when the variation pattern command and the state command are simultaneously output from the main controller 110, that is, during the first special symbol variation start process of the main controller 110 (see S210 in FIG. 30) In the case where the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 32) is executed, the special figure 1 variation pattern command is set, and then the state command indicating that the game state has changed is set. Also, the game state currently set on the voice lamp control device 113 side can be determined earlier than the special figure 1 variation pattern command.

Therefore, for example, when the jackpot of special figure 1 is won in a state where the variable probability state is set, and the latent probability state is set during the jackpot fluctuation, the probability state is set on the audio lamp control device 113 side It is possible to easily set a variation performance corresponding to a variation pattern command that becomes a big hit variation in a state that it is determined that it has been done.

It should be noted that, unlike the configuration of the present embodiment, when configured to execute processing corresponding to the variation pattern command prior to the determination processing of the state command, from the variation pattern command corresponding to the above-described jackpot variation, probability variation Only the information indicating that the jackpot has been won by the first special symbol lottery in the state is received first, and the variable display corresponding to the received contents is set. Therefore, it is difficult to execute the variation display indicating that the latent definite state is set at the same time as the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is started. Due to the delay in the variable display indicating that the latent certainty state has been set in this way, the timing of informing the player of the right-handed game is delayed, and the player feels uncomfortable. The problem arises that I will give

On the other hand, in this embodiment, as described above, the main control device 110 side executes the process of varying the game state after determining whether the big hit is successful and setting the variation pattern, whereas the sound ramp control device 113 On the side, first, the process of determining the current game state is executed, and then the variable display corresponding to the variable pattern is set. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent the variable display corresponding to the previous game state from being set and executed even though the potential state is set.

In addition, since the sound lamp control device 113 side is configured to define the receiving order of various commands output from the main control device 110, there is a need to define the output order of various commands on the main control device 110 side. can be reduced. Therefore, the control load of main controller 110 can be reduced.

Next, with reference to Drawing 60, special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S4202) performed by MPU221 in sound lamp control device 113 is explained. Figure 60 is the flowchart which shows the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S4202). This special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S4202) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and is set to the gaming state Accordingly, a process of setting a display mode (variation pattern for main variation, variation pattern for dependent variation) corresponding to the first special symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

Then, the display control device 114 displays the third symbol based on the display mode (display command) set here and the display variation pattern command set in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 73) described later. The display mode displayed in the display area of the display device 81 is set. Hereinafter, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S4202) will be described.

When special figure 1 fluctuation start processing is set, first. Set the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e to ON (S4301), extract the variation pattern from the received special figure 1 variation pattern command (S4302), and select the detailed display mode using the variation pattern selection table 222a S4303 ).

Next, the information (information indicating the current game state) set (stored) in the sub-state setting area 223k is read to determine whether the current game state is the potential state (S4304). In the process of S4304, if it is determined that the current state is not a latent state (normal state, probability variable state) (S4304: No), since the game state is mainly the variation display of the first special symbol, A display command indicating the main fluctuation pattern in FIG. 1 is set (S4305), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4304, if it is determined that the current gaming state is a latent state (S4304: Yes), because the gaming state is mainly the variation display of the second special symbol (the first special symbol (Because it is a game state where the variation display is subordinate), the command for display indicating the special figure 1 subordinate variation pattern is set (S4306), and this processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to Drawing 61, special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S4204) performed by MPU221 in sound lamp control device 113 is explained. Figure 61 is the flowchart which shows the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S4204). This special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S4204) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and is set to the gaming state Accordingly, a process of setting a display mode (main fluctuation fluctuation pattern, subordinate fluctuation fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the second special symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

Then, the display control device 114 displays the third pattern based on the display mode (display command) set here and the display variation pattern command set in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 71) described later. The display mode displayed in the display area of the display device 81 is set. Hereinafter, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S4204) will be described.

When the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S4204) is set, first. Set the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f to ON (S4351), extract the variation pattern from the received special figure 2 variation pattern command (S4352), and select the detailed display mode using the variation pattern selection table 222a ( S4353).

Next, the information (information indicating the current game state) set (stored) in the sub-state setting area 223k is read to determine whether the current game state is the potential state (S4354). In the process of S4354, if it is determined that the current state is not a potential state (normal state, probability variable state) (S4354: No), the second special symbol variation display is a secondary game state, A display command indicating the sub-variation pattern of FIG. 2 is set (S4355), and the process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S4354, if it is determined that the gaming state is the latent state (S4354: Yes), since the gaming state is mainly the variation display of the second special symbol (the variation display of the first special symbol (Because it is a game state to be subordinate), set the display command indicating the special figure 2 main fluctuation pattern (S4356), and end this process.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment in which the variation (lottery) of the first special symbol and the variation (lottery) of the second special symbol are executed simultaneously (in parallel), both special symbols While simultaneously displaying the variable effect display (variable display of the third symbol and the fourth symbol) corresponding to the variable display of the third symbol display device 81, according to the set game state, each special symbol (first Special pattern, second special pattern) display mode (size of display area, presence or absence of display as the third pattern) can be variably set, so that the fluctuation situation (lottery result and number of fluctuations) in the current situation It is possible to make the player easily understand the special symbol type to be watched.

Therefore, even if a game specification is used in which a plurality of special symbol types simultaneously (parallelly) executes a variation (lottery), it is possible to prevent a game from being provided that is difficult for the player to understand.

Next, the stop type command reception process (S4206) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a flow chart showing this stop type command reception process (S4206). This stop type command reception process (S4206) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. Details of the stop type command reception process (S4206) will be described below.

In the stop class command reception process (S4206), first, in response to the received command, when the special figure 1 stop class command is received, the special figure 1 stop class selection flag 223g is set to ON, and the special figure 2 When the stop type command is received, the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is set to ON (S4401). Next, the stop type (jackpot A to jackpot D, small hit, off, reach off, etc.) is extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command (S4402), and the process ends.

The stop type extracted in the process of S4402 is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. In addition, the stop type extracted from the special figure 1 stop type command can be identified as the stop type of the first special symbol, and the stop type extracted from the special figure 2 stop type command is the second special symbol Each stop type is stored so as to be identifiable. Thereby, even if the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) start to fluctuate at the same time, it becomes possible to manage the stop types respectively, and to execute appropriate fluctuation display. can be done.

Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the content of the pending ball count process (S4208) executed in the command determination process (S4151 in FIG. 59) will be described. FIG. 63 is a flow chart showing the pending ball number processing (S4208). In this pending ball number processing (S4208), processing for setting the display mode of the competition mode is executed when the gaming state is the latent state.

When the pending ball number processing (S4208) is executed, first, the symbol type (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol) corresponding to the received command (reserved ball number command) is extracted (S4501), The value of the reserved ball number counter (first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d) corresponding to the extracted symbol type is updated (S4502), and the process proceeds to S4503.

In the process of S4503, it is determined whether or not the game state is latent (S4503). If it is determined that the game is not in the latent probability state (normal state or variable probability state) (S4503: No), other processing related to the held ball is executed (S4509), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if the game state is latent (S4503: Yes), it is determined whether or not the right-handed flag 223j is ON (S4504). This right-handed flag 223j is set to ON in the jackpot-related processing (S5002) in the jackpot-related processing (S4218), and during the jackpot ending in which the latent state is set after the jackpot game ends, the first special symbol holding ball It is a flag for setting a dash mode that prompts the player to play right-handed when it is determined that there is. In the process of S4504, if it is determined that the right-handed flag 223j is not ON (S4504: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4504, when it is determined that the right-handed flag 223j is ON (S4504: Yes), it is determined whether the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 0 (S4505). When it is determined that the number of held balls of the first special symbol is 0 (S4505: Yes), it is time to end the dash mode, so the dash end flag 223q is set to ON (S4506), and the right-handed flag 223j is set. is set to off (S4507), and other processing related to the held ball is executed (S4508), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of the first special symbol reserved balls is not 0 (that is, it is 1 or more) (S4505: No), other processing is executed (S4508), and this processing ends.

In this embodiment, when the latent definite state is reached, the player is notified using the dash mode that there is a reserved ball in the first special symbol, but depending on the state of the first special symbol, Execution of the special figure 2 game may be emphasized and displayed. Specifically, the display mode of the right-handed display may be changed according to the game state or lottery result, such as when the first special symbol is not fluctuating, fluctuating out, or fluctuating in the big win. As a result, the player can be prompted to play the special figure 2 game in an easy-to-understand manner.

Next, referring to FIG. 64, the state command processing (S4212) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 64 is a flow chart showing this state command processing (S4212). This state command processing (S4212) is executed in the command determination processing (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and is executed according to the set game state. A process for setting different display modes to be displayed on the three-symbol display device 81 is executed. Details of the state command processing (S4212) will be described below.

When the state command process (S4212) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the currently set game state is to be changed (S4601). Here, it is determined whether or not the game state set in the sub-state setting area 223k is different from the game state indicated by the state command received this time. In the process of S4601, if it is determined that there is a change in the game state (S4601: Yes), it is determined whether the game state after the change is the normal state (S4602).

In the processing of S4602, when it is determined that the game state after the change is the normal state (when the state command received this time is a command indicating the normal state) (S4602: Yes), the main display area corresponding to the normal state A setting command is set (S4603), a display command indicating the normal mode is set (S4604), information indicated by the status command received this time is stored (set) in the sub-status setting area 223k (S4610), and this process is executed. finish.

Here, by notifying the display control device 114 of the commands set in the processing of S4603 and the processing of S4604, the variable effect display in the normal state is executed. Thus, in the present embodiment, in the audio lamp control device 113, based on the state command output from the main control device 110, the types of various display modes displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 ( mode, background), and outputs a command indicating the type to the display control device 114 .

By configuring in this way, for example, it is possible to eliminate the need to set the display mode of the variable effect display for each game state set on the sound lamp control device 113 side. That is, it outputs to the display control device 114 a command (type command) indicating the type of various display modes corresponding to the currently set game state and a variation pattern command (common command) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol. display data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a display mode corresponding to the current gaming state and the received variation pattern based on the type command received by the display control device 114 side and the common command. Can be set. Therefore, the processing load of the audio ramp control device 113 can be reduced.

In addition, as described above, when the display data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set by combining a plurality of commands received from the sound lamp control device 113 on the display control device 114 side, Information (confirmation information) indicating the content of display data after setting is output from the display control device 114 side to the audio lamp control device 113 side, and the confirmation information received by the audio lamp control device 113 side is correct. If it is determined that the determination result is not appropriate, a simple display variation pattern command indicating appropriate information is set, and the contents of the already set display data are set. It is preferable to configure so as to rewrite to simple display data.

By configuring in this way, when proper display data is not set for various commands received by the audio lamp controller 113 from the main controller 110, simple display data indicating proper information is set. It is possible to display a variable effect display based on the simple display data. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's willingness to play due to the execution of a variable effect display with contents different from the actual game result (lottery result of special symbols). In addition, the simple display data described above includes, for example, display data for displaying a special mode (for example, black background mode) that does not correspond to any game state, and display data for executing variable display of the fourth symbol. For example, display data having a smaller amount of data than the display data used in normal variable effect display may be used.

In addition, in this embodiment, the configuration described above is used, but it is not limited to this, and the current game state and the received variation pattern command are set on the side of the sound lamp control device 113. It may be configured to

Returning to FIG. 64, the description continues. In the processing of S4602, if it is determined that the game state after the change is not the normal state (if the state command received this time is not a command indicating the normal state) (S4602: No), then the game state after the change It is determined whether the game state is in the latent certainty state (S4605). A command for setting the main display area corresponding to the state, that is, a command for setting the third symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol is set (S4606), and a display command indicating the super mode is set (S4607). Then, the process proceeds to S4610.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4605, if it is determined that the game state after the change is not the latent state (not the command indicating the latent state of the state command received this time), that is, if the state command indicating the variable probability state is received (S4605: No), sets the main display area setting command corresponding to the variable probability state (S4608), sets the display command indicating the challenge mode (S4609), and proceeds to the processing of S4610 described above.

Next, with reference to FIG. 65, the fluctuation stop process (S4214), which is one process in the command determination process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound ramp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 65 is a flow chart showing the contents of the fluctuation stop processing (S4214). This fluctuation stop processing (S4214) sets the display mode when receiving a fluctuation stop related command (a command set when stop display is performed based on the lottery result of another special symbol lottery) from the main controller 110. processing is executed.

When the fluctuation stop processing (S4214) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command is received (S4701). This special figure 1 variation stop command is set when the second special symbol (special figure 2) is stopped and displayed with a big hit in the second special symbol variation stop process (see S215 in FIG. 42) of the main control device 110 (See S1503 in FIG. 42).

In the processing of S4701, if it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command has been received (S4701: Yes), then the current gaming state is latent state (whether super mode is running) is determined Then (S4702), if it is determined that it is in the latent certain state (S4702: Yes), a display command for stopping the sub-variation is set (S4703), and the process proceeds to S4705. When the display command for stopping the sub-variation is set in the process of S4703, the fourth symbol displayed in the small display area Dm1 (see FIG. 6A) is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a failure.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4702 that the game is not in the latent state (S4702: No), a display command for stopping fluctuation corresponding to the interrupt V effect is set (S4704), and the process proceeds to S4705. Also, in the process of S4701, if it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command is not received (S4701: No), the process proceeds to S4705.

Then, in the process of S4705, it is determined whether the fluctuation stop related command received this time is the special figure 2 fluctuation stop command (S4705). This special figure 2 variation stop command is set when the first special symbol (special figure 1) is stopped and displayed with a big hit in the first special symbol variation stop process (see S209 in FIG. 34) of the main control device 110 (See S806 in FIG. 34).

In the process of S4705, if it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop command has been received (S4705: Yes), then the current gaming state is a latent state (super mode is running) to determine Then (S4706), if it is determined to be in the latent state (S4706: Yes), a display command for stopping the main fluctuation is set (S4707), and the process proceeds to S4709.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4706 that the state is not the latent state (S4706: No), a display command for stopping the subordinate fluctuation is set (S4708), and the processing proceeds to S4709. When the display command is set in the processing of S4708, the fourth symbol displayed in the small display area Dm2 (see FIG. 7(a)) is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a failure. Also, if it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop command is not received in the process of S4705 (S4705: No), the process proceeds to S4709.

Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the confirmation related process (S4216), which is one process in the command determination process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 66 is a flow chart showing the details of the confirmation related process (S4216). In this confirmation related process (S4216), when the confirmation command of the first special symbol is received, it is determined whether it is time to end the dash mode, and the process of ending the dash mode is executed.

In the determination related process (S4216), first, it is determined whether or not the dash end flag 223q is ON (S4751). In the voice lamp control device 113, when receiving the special figure 1 confirmation command from the main control device 110, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the dash mode. If it is determined that the dash end flag 223q is ON (S4751: Yes), a command indicating the end of the dash mode is set (S4752), the dash end flag 223q is set OFF (S4753), and this process ends. do. On the other hand, in the process of S4751, if it is determined that the dash end flag 223q is not ON (S4751: No), this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 67, the content of the temporary stop related process (S4218) will be described. FIG. 67 is a flow chart showing the contents of the temporary stop related process (S4218). In this temporary stop related process (S4218), the process of determining the remaining time of the special figure fluctuation time when the temporary stop command is received, and the effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 when the 1 fluctuation restart command is received (additional effect) setting processing is executed.

When the temporary stop related process (S4218) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 temporary stop command is received (S4801), and if it is determined that it is received (S4801: Yes), the special figure 1 temporary The stop flag 223m is set to ON (S4802). Then, the remaining fluctuation time of the currently set fluctuation pattern is calculated (S4803). Then, it is determined whether or not the remaining variation time calculated in the processing of S4803 is less than 5 seconds (S4804). is set (S4805), and the process proceeds to S4809.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4804, if it is determined that the remaining variation time is not less than 5 seconds (5 seconds or longer) (S4804: No), then the remaining variation period is 5 seconds or longer and is longer than 60 seconds. It is determined whether it is less (S4806), and if it is determined that it is 5 seconds or more and less than 60 seconds (S4806: Yes), a period B indicating normal remaining fluctuation time is stored in the remaining time information storage area 223p. set (S4807) and proceed to the processing of S4809.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4806 that the remaining variation time is longer than 60 seconds (S4806: No), a period C indicating that the remaining variation time is long is set in the remaining time information storage area 223p (S4808). , S4809. In this way, the fluctuation time (remaining fluctuation period) to be executed when the special figure fluctuation is resumed is calculated at the timing when the special figure fluctuation is interrupted (the subtraction of the special figure fluctuation time is interrupted), and corresponds to that period By setting the information to be performed, it is possible to execute the production (additional production) suitable for the remaining fluctuation time without delay at the timing of restarting the special figure fluctuation.

In addition, in this embodiment, the period information (period A to period C) to be set in the remaining time information storage area 223p corresponding to the fluctuation time (remaining fluctuation period) executed when the special figure fluctuation resumes is made different However, without being limited to this, for example, the selection ratio of each period information is such that the shorter the remaining time, the easier it is to select period A, and the longer the remaining time, the easier it is to select period C. may be configured to differ according to the remaining time, or the remaining period may be divided into predetermined time intervals (eg, 30 seconds), and the periods A to C may be arranged in order for each division. You can

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the relationship between the additional effect executed based on the period information set in the remaining time information storage area 223p and the remaining variation time, and the remaining variation. The fun of predicting time can be provided.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop command has not been received in the process of S4801 (S4801: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 temporary stop command has been received (S4809). If it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop command has been received (S4809: Yes), the process of changing the target of the above-described S4802 to S4808 processing from the first special symbol to the second special symbol is executed (S4810 to S4816), the process proceeds to S4817. After executing any of S4813, S4815, S4816 processing, or when it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop command has not been received in the processing of S4809 (S4809: No), resume processing (S4817) Execute and terminate this process.

Next, the contents of the restart processing (S4817) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68 is a flow chart showing the contents of the restart processing (S4817). This restart processing (S4817) executes the processing of setting the effect to be executed when the special figure 1 restart command is received.

When the restart process (S4817) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 temporary stop flag is on (S4901), and when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag is off (S4901: No) , the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4901, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag is ON (S4901: Yes), then it is determined whether the special figure 1 resume command is received (S4902), special figure 1 If it is determined that the restart command has been received (S4902: Yes), then the special figure 1 temporary stop flag is set to OFF (S4903), and the remaining time information stored in the remaining time information storage area 223p is read. (S4904), determines a variation pattern from the restart variation pattern selection table 222b based on the read remaining time information (S4905), and sets a restart variation pattern command for display corresponding to the determined variation pattern (S4906). Next, the information set in the remaining time information storage area 223p is reset (S4907), and then the process proceeds to S4908. On the other hand, in the process of S4902, even if it is determined that the special figure 1 restart command has not been received (S4902: No), the process proceeds to S4908.

In the process of S4908, first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 temporary stop flag is on (S4908), and if it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag is off (S4908: No), end this process do. On the other hand, in the process of S4908, if it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag is ON (S4901: Yes), then it is determined whether the special figure 2 resume command is received (S4909), special figure 2 If it is determined that the resume command has been received (S4909: Yes), then the special figure 2 temporary stop flag is set to OFF (S4910), and the remaining time information stored in the remaining time information storage area 223p is read. (S4911), a variation pattern is determined from the restart variation pattern selection table 222b based on the read remaining time information (S4912), and a restart variation pattern command for display corresponding to the determined variation pattern is set (S4913). Next, the information set in the remaining time information storage area 223p is reset (S4914), and then this processing ends.

As described above, when the special figure fluctuation is interrupted in the present embodiment, after the normal production (the production display executed when the special figure fluctuation is started) ends, the special figure fluctuation resumes. During the period until the third pattern is displayed in a swinging manner, when the special figure fluctuation is resumed, an additional presentation corresponding to the special figure fluctuation period (remaining fluctuation period) after the restart is performed. However, other configurations may be used.

For example, an effect period discriminating means for discriminating a normal effect period during which a normal effect is executed is provided, and when the effect period discriminating means determines that the normal effect period has ended, the additional effect is executed. good too. By configuring in this way, the normal effect and the additional effect can be executed continuously, so it is possible to provide a more suitable effect display to the player. Also, in this case, there may be an error between the end timing of the additional effect period in which the additional effect is executed and the special figure fluctuation period after the restart, but during the error period, the additional effect is continuously executed. Alternatively, a shaking effect may be executed to display the third symbol in a swinging manner. Further, an error period discriminating means for discriminating the length of the error period is provided, and when the error period discriminating means discriminates that the error period is longer than a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), the additional effect is executed again. It may be configured as

Next, with reference to FIG. 69, the hit-related process (S4220), which is one process in the command determination process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 69 is a flow chart showing the details of the win-related process (S4220). In this winning-related process (S4220), as a result of the lottery of the special symbols, the effect display corresponding to the big winning game or the small winning game executed when the big winning or the small winning is won is executed by the third symbol display device 81. , and processing corresponding to various commands sent from the main controller 110 when a big win or a small win is won is executed.

In addition, when receiving a prize ball number command for indicating the number of prize balls won during a winning game (big win game, small win game), the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball number command is accumulated and accumulated A process of setting a display number-of-balls command based on the result is executed.

In the hit-related process (S4220), first, it is determined whether the command received by the command determination process (see FIG. 59) is a jackpot-related command (S5001). When it is determined that the received command is a jackpot-related command (S5001: Yes), a jackpot-related process is executed (S5002), and then this process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 70, the jackpot related processing (S5002), which is one of the winning related processing (S4220 in FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 70 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot related process (S5002). In the jackpot-related processing, processing is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to the jackpot game to be executed when the jackpot is won. Processing corresponding to various commands sent from 110 is executed.

In the jackpot-related processing (S5002), first, it is determined whether or not the hit-related command received by the hit-related processing (S5001 in FIG. 69) is a jackpot start command (S5101). When it is determined that the received command is a jackpot start command (S5101: Yes), a display jackpot start command is set (S5102), and then this process ends. The display jackpot start command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 58). It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot start command, the display control device 114 displays an effect suggesting the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81 .

On the other hand, in the process of S5101, when it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S5101: No), it is then determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S5103). If it is determined that the round number command has been received (S5103: Yes), the round number command for display is set based on the round number (S5104), and then this process ends. In this embodiment, information indicating the number of rounds is transmitted from the main controller 110 as the number-of-rounds command. In order to reduce the amount of command data to be transmitted from the control device 110, when information for indicating that a new round has started is transmitted from the main control device 110 as a round update command, an audio lamp control device The RAM 223 of 113 is provided with a round number accumulation counter for accumulating the number of received round update commands when a round update command is received. It may be configured to calculate the number and set the number-of-rounds command for display.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5103 that the round number command has not been received (S5103: No), then it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received (S5105). If it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S5105: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5105 that an ending command has been received (S5105: Yes), the process proceeds to S5106.

In the processing of S5106, it is determined whether or not the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is 1 or more (S5106), and the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is smaller than 1 (that is, 0 Yes) (S5106: No), an ending command including RUSH is set (S5107), and then this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5106, if it is determined that the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is 1 or more (S5106: Yes), the right-handed flag 223j is set to ON (S5108), including a dash An ending command is set (S5109), and then this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 69, the description is continued. In the process of S5001, when it is determined that the received command is not a big hit related command (S5001: No), it is determined whether or not the received command is a small hit related command (S5003). When it is determined that the received command is a small hit related command (S5003: Yes), a small hit related process (S5004) is executed, and then this process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 71, the small hit related process (S5004) which is one process in the hit related process (S4220 in FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 71) is a flow chart showing the contents of the small hit related process (S5004). In the small winning related processing, processing is performed for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to the small winning game executed when the small winning is won. , processes corresponding to various commands sent from the main controller 110 are executed.

In the small hit related process (S5004), first, it is determined whether or not the hit related command received by the hit related process (S4220 in FIG. 69) is a small hit start command (S5201). In the processing of S5201, when it is determined that the small winning start command is received (S5201: Yes), the small winning start command for display is set (S5202), and then this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5201, when it is determined that the received command is not a small winning start command (S5201: No), it is determined whether an ending command has been received (S5203). If it is determined that the received command is not the ending command (S5203: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is an ending command (S5203: Yes), a display ending command is set (S5204), and this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 69, the description is continued. In the process of S5003, when it is determined that the received command is not a small hit related command (S5003: No), it is then determined whether or not a prize command has been received (S5005). If it is determined that the received command is not a prize ball command (S5005: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the received command is determined to be a prize ball command (S5005: Yes), the value corresponding to the received command is added to the value of the prize ball number counter (not shown) (S5006), A prize ball number command for display corresponding to the value of the prize ball counter after addition is set (S5007), and then this process is terminated.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the state command reception process (see S4212 in FIG. 64), the period until the normal state or the variable probability state is set (advantageous duration) The number of prize balls corresponding to the command for the number of prize balls received inside is accumulated by the number of prize balls counter. The number of prize balls corresponding to the cumulative value of the counter for the number of prize balls is displayed during the win game (big win game, small win game) or during the latent state.

By configuring in this way, the player can easily understand the total number of balls acquired during the period (advantageous continuous period) from when the latent probability state is set until the normal state (probability variable state) is set again. can be notified.

In this embodiment, the cumulative value of the number of prize balls obtained during the advantageous continuous period is displayed during the advantageous continuous period. For example, during the advantageous continuation period, the number of prize balls obtained in the big winning game and the number of prize balls obtained in the small winning game may be displayed separately. In this case, the winning game state (middle winning, middle winning) at the time of receiving the winning ball command is discriminated based on the information set in the sub-state setting area 223k, and the number of winning balls is accumulated for each discrimination result. It is good to have a means. As a result, the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period can be easily sorted.

Furthermore, the number of prize balls acquired in one game period (a period combining the jackpot game period and the latent state period until the next jackpot game is executed) within the advantageous continuation period is accumulated and displayed. It may be configured as follows. In this case, it is preferable to provide storage means for storing the cumulative number of prize balls won during one game period as history information, and to display the history of the information stored in the storage means.

In addition, as described above, when the configuration for cumulatively displaying the number of winning balls obtained within the advantageous continuation period is used, the number of times that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes the lottery result (big win, small win) that is advantageous to the player. , or the lottery probability that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes the lottery result (big win, small win) that is advantageous to the player may be displayed.

By constructing in this way, it becomes possible for the player to analyze the lottery result of the special symbols executed during the advantageous continuation period and the number of prize balls obtained during the advantageous continuation period, and to play the game enthusiastically. can be done.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, unless a special symbol jackpot is won in a state in which the latent certainty state is set, the latent certainty state continues, and a small winning game is performed during the latent certainty state. It is configured to be easily broken (special figure 2 lottery is easily executed). Therefore, during the advantageous continuation period, in addition to winning the jackpot for which the advantageous continuation period is set again, the player plays the game with a sense of expectation that the state of not winning the jackpot will continue for a long period of time. will do.

In such a case, the player can grasp how the actual game content (special figure 2 lottery result) is with respect to the jackpot winning probability and the small winning probability preset in the pachinko machine 10. It is preferable to configure so as to display such a display mode. By using such a configuration, for example, since the actual jackpot winning probability is lower than the preset jackpot winning probability, the number of small winning games executed during the latent certainty state increases, and many prize balls and the actual small winning winning probability is higher than the preset small winning winning probability, so the number of small winning games executed during the latent certainty state increases and many prize balls are acquired. A player can analyze the cases in which he could identify them. Therefore, by making the player analyze the number of winning balls obtained during the advantageous continuation period, it is possible to make the player interested in the game content and to make it easier to continue playing the game.

Furthermore, when the game content (lottery result of special symbols) during the advantageous continuation period satisfies a predetermined condition, a notification means may be provided for executing condition achievement notification to indicate that fact, for example, winning a jackpot. The number of times of special symbol lottery executed by (so-called, the number of times of addiction) may be executed to indicate that the condition achievement notification has exceeded a predetermined number of times (100 times), or executed during the small hit winning A condition achievement notification may be executed to indicate that the number of special symbol lotteries (the number of lotteries of the special figure 2) has exceeded a predetermined number of times (10 times). Further, condition achievement notification may be executed to indicate that the number of prize balls obtained in one game pattern exceeds a predetermined number (5000).

Next, the variable display setting process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72 is a flow chart showing this variable display setting process (S4112). This variable display setting process (S4112 in FIG. 72) is one process of the main process (see FIG. 58) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. As described above, in the variable display setting process (S4112 in FIG. 72), in order to display the variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81, the first or special figure 2 variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 Based on this, the process of setting the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol or the second special symbol and transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. In addition, based on the extracted stop type (jackpot A to jackpot D), the process of setting the display special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is executed.

In the fluctuation display setting process (S4112), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S5301). And, if it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is off (S5301: No), since it is in a state where the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, the process of S5305 Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is on (S5301: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to off (S5302).

Then, in the process of S4302 of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (see S4202 of FIG. 60) executed in the command determination process (see S4111 of FIG. 59), the variation extracted from the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 Based on the variation pattern related to the production, the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is set (S5303), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is subtracted by 1 (S5304), and the 2 special design (special figure 2) it moves to the processing of S5305 in order to set the fluctuation indication regarding.

The display variation pattern command set in the process of S5303 is output to the display control device 114 in the command output process (S4102 in FIG. 58) executed in the main process (see FIG. 58) of the audio lamp control device 113. be. The display control device 114 creates display data to be displayed in the display area (display screen) of the third symbol display device 81 based on the received display variation pattern command and various display commands for indicating the game state.

Next, the processing of S5305 to S5308 in FIG. 72 will be described. The processing of S5305 to S5308 is different from the processing of S5301 to S5304 in FIG. 72 described above in that the type of target special symbol is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol. are identical. Therefore, detailed description is omitted.

When the process of S5305 is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is ON (S5305), and if it is determined that it is not set to ON (S5305: No), the process of S5309 Move to On the other hand, if it is determined that it is set to ON in the process of S5305 (S5305: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is set to OFF (S5306), based on the extracted fluctuation pattern command, the second A special symbol display variation pattern command is set (S5307), the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d is subtracted by 1 (S5308), and the process proceeds to 5309.

In the process of S5309, it is determined whether the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to ON (S5309), and if it is determined that it is not set to ON (S5309 : No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is set to ON (S5309: Yes), the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to OFF (S5310), and the extracted stop type Set as it is (S5311), set the display special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command (S5312), and terminate this process.

As described above, in this embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed at the same time (in parallel), and the lottery of the first special symbol The lottery of the second special symbol is configured to make it easier for the player to win a lottery result that is advantageous to the player (for example, winning a small prize or shifting to a game state that is advantageous to the player).

The types of special symbols that are likely to be drawn according to the game state to be set are configured to be variable, and when a specific first game state (for example, a latent state) is set, a second special symbol is selected. lottery is easily executed, and when a big win is won in the lottery of the second special pattern during the first game state, the first game state is set again.

Furthermore, in order to facilitate the lottery of the second special symbol during the hidden probability state which is the low probability state of the normal symbol, even if the normal state which is the low probability state of the normal symbol is set. Also, since the second special symbol lottery can be executed, a long (10 minutes) fluctuation time is set in order to suppress the frequent execution of the second special symbol lottery in the normal state. It is configured so that

However, in the gaming machine constructed in this way, it is possible to execute the lottery for the second special symbol in the normal state, although the efficiency is low, and if a big win is won in the lottery for the second special symbol, There is a problem that a lottery result that is advantageous to the player is given.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the state where the normal state is set, the lottery of the second special symbol is forced to stop or temporarily stopped. , it is set so that the second special symbol is unlikely to win the big hit when the normal state is set.

In addition, in the above-described first embodiment, during the jackpot game that is executed based on the winning of the jackpot, the ball passes through the specific area provided in the prize winning device, so that after the jackpot game ends, the special It may be configured such that a high-probability state of the symbol is set.

In addition, in the present embodiment, three game states (normal state, latent probability state, probability variable state) are configured to be settable as game states, but there are four game states that can be set (normal state, latent probability state) , probability variable state, time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), or two or less.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are configured to be executable at the same time, and the lottery of the second special symbol, which is likely to win a small hit, is in a specific gaming state. Although it is configured so that it can be easily executed in the (latent state), other configurations may be used. An attached first ball entrance and a second ball entrance 640 to which no electric accessory 640a is attached are provided, and performing a right-handed game when a variable probability state is set is the most advantageous game for the player. can be configured to

When configured in this way, during the normal state, similar to the above-described first embodiment, the special figure 1 variation is set so that the variation time shorter than the special figure 2 variation is set easily, and during the latent state is set so that it is easier to set a shorter variation time for special figure 2 variation than for special figure 1 variation, as in the first embodiment described above, and the probability variation state and time saving state are released with the electric accessory 640a. It is better to set it so that it becomes easier.

As a result, during the normal state, a game aiming for a big win is performed by the drawing of the first special pattern by the left-handed game, and during the time-saving state, the drawing of the first special pattern is performed more efficiently than during the normal state by the right-handed game. A game aiming at a big hit is performed by performing a game aiming at a big hit, and a game aiming at a big hit is performed by performing a lottery of the first special pattern with a higher probability than a normal state and efficiently by a right-handed game during the variable probability state, and a latent probability. During the state, it is possible to play a game aiming at a big hit or a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbols by the right-handed game.

<Regarding control processing of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 87. FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 can be broadly classified into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing for one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 and execute the V interrupt process.

First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 is a flow chart showing this main process. The main processing is to execute initialization processing when the power is turned on.

Activation of this main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the command pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. FIG. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 . Then, the MPU 231 fetches the received instruction code from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND type flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the NOR ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Since it is a memory from which data can be read, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is set so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. to start.

Here, referring to FIG. 74, the boot processing (S6001) will be described. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S6001) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG.

As described above, in this embodiment, the control program and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional game machines. The character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed is stored. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND-type flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM and the data table. A process of transferring and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is canceled is executed. Of the control programs stored in the 2-program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the rest of the boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101.

By setting the command pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

After the command pointer 231a is set by the process of S6102, the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set command pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. Of the control programs stored, the remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 73) is completed. By setting the top address of the program corresponding to the initializing process (see S6002 in FIG. 73) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is finished, and this boot process ends.

By executing the boot process (S6001) in this way, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the work RAM 233, which is composed entirely of DRAM. It is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processing is executed using

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect part.

On the other hand, without storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the rest of the boot program is stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a. , the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 74, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. may be part of As for the boot program transferred here, a predetermined amount of the control program including all remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233a. 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S6101 transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the beginning of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing is further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount of part of the remaining boot program, and subsequently stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the instruction pointer 231a in step S6101. and the processing of S6102 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the rest of the boot program not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. Using the boot program, a predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 has been described as having a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released. It may be stored in the 1-program storage area 234d1. In this case, the MPU 231 may perform the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102 after starting the boot process. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, more quickly.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the registers in the MPU 231 and the I/O device. In addition, processing for clearing the memory of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the image controller 237 is initialized, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. and instruct execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color according to the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, it is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to easily and immediately judge whether or not the activation can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction contains the leading and trailing addresses of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating transfer end to the MPU 231 . By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. The MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby ascertaining that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing in S6003, the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to . This transfer instruction contains the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, and information on the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235). , and the head address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination. It is transferred to the change image area 235b when the power is turned on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S6004, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 85(a)), which will be described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S7502 in FIG. 85A).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. Remains on until terminated. As a result, during this period, the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75(b)) can be simplified so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) (not shown) is drawn. Command determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. 75B) and simple display setting processing (see S6309 in FIG. 75B) are executed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234. Due to its slow read speed, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Therefore, as in this main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying it on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player and the people involved in the hall can see the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed, so that the rest of the resident video RAM 235 can be resident. It is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped while the image data to be processed is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 .

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the operation check efficiency by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234. FIG.

In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts the game while the display is displayed on the display device 81, a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning), and an instruction to start the variable effect is issued. When received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the power-on variation image is immediately displayed during the variation performance period, and simple variation is performed. can perform. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the third symbol display device 81 continues to display the main image when the power is turned on. is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, and it takes a long time to transfer the data. However, in this pachinko machine 10, since it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after the power is restored, Immediately after the power is turned on, even while the main image is being displayed, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the processing of S6005, interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 75(a). FIG. 75(a) is a flow chart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes command interrupt processing.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of V interrupt processing to be described later, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 75(b), V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 75(b) is a flow chart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 and sent to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 75(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301). If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. In order to display on the display device 81, command determination processing (S6302) is executed, and then display setting processing (S6303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S6302), the content of the command from the sound lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demonstration display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when main controller 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly comprehend the mode and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113, and generate a performance image corresponding to the mode. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 76 to 81. FIG.

In the display setting process (S6303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302), etc., an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. specifically identify the content of In addition, depending on the status of processing, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is executed (S6304). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S6303) or the simple display setting processing (S6309). The type of sprite (display object) to be displayed is specified, and various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 is caused to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236 a of the video RAM 236 , even when a continuous notice command or a back image change command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 , the image controller 237 is continuously instructed to A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice images used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.例文帳に追加Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86. FIG.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, based on the types of sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S6305), 27, and transmits the drawing list to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list (S6306). Details of the rendering process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the stop type command for display is detected, the stop type indicated by the stop type command for display (jackpot A, jackpot B, front-rear out reach, front-rear out reach, complete out) The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop design after the variable effect displayed on the third design display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the process of S6301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S6301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third pattern display device 81, simple command determination processing (S6308) is executed, then simple display setting processing (S6309) is executed, and the process proceeds to S6304.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 76 to 81, the details of the command determination process (S6302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing this command determination processing.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 76, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401). After completing the command determination process, the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402). All unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed for their command types (S6403).

Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). Then, if there is a variation pattern command for display (S6404: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed (S6405), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the variation pattern command process (S6405) will now be described with reference to FIG. 77(a). FIG. 77(a) is a flow chart showing the variation pattern command process (S6405). This variation pattern command processing (S6405) executes processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the variation pattern command process, first, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6501).

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of variation at a time interval of several seconds or more, it does not receive two or more display variation pattern commands within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly used for display. There is a possibility that it will be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main control device will actually produce a variation effect with a shorter variation time than the set display data table. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation performance according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, the variation display data table actually has a longer variation than the set display data table. Even if the variable effect with time is instructed by main controller 110, after the variable effect according to display data table buffer 233d is completed, main controller 110 will send the next display for display, as will be described later. Since the display of the third pattern display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the third pattern display on the third pattern display device 81 without any discomfort. 3 You can continue to see the variation of the pattern.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S6505), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S6505, the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6501 , extracts the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and specifies the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81. At the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e The transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set to 1, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is stored in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. image storage area 236a.

Further, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h to which the time data is set by the process of S6503 is used to measure the time of the variable presentation specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable presentation in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type command for display from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the processing of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command in the unprocessed commands (S6406), If there is a stop type command for display (S6406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S6407), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the stop type command process (S6407) will now be described with reference to FIG. 77(b). FIG. 77(b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the stop type command processing (S6407), first, the stop type information indicated by the stop type command for display (any of jackpots A to G, small hits A to C, reach out, complete out) stop type table corresponding to is determined (S6601), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75(b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device Finally, the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed in 81 is set (S6602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each of the stop symbols, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned on. It is set to ON (S6603) and returns to the command determination processing.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has passed since the variation based on the data table is started. , offset information (design offset information) from the stop design set by the processing of S6602. In the above-described task processing (S6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, the stop design set by the process of S6602 is specified from the stop design determination flag set by S6603, and the specified stop By adding the design offset information acquired by the display setting process to the design, the third design to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third pattern is stored is specified. Image data corresponding to the third design is stored in the third design area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

It should be noted that since the main controller 110 always determines the start of fluctuation at a time interval of several seconds or more, two or more stop type commands for display are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore command determination processing is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the processing of S6601, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more stop type commands for display are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out, and the stop type Decide on a table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss is set by the processing of S6602.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is out". A stop pattern corresponding to the "big win" is displayed, and the player is misled into thinking that the pachinko machine 10 has "a special pattern big win", and there is a risk of degrading the reliability of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss, in fact, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete loss. Even if the symbols are displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "jackpot of special symbols", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description is continued. In the processing of S6406, if it is determined that there is no stop type command for display (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an opening command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6408). If there is an opening command (S6408: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S6409), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the opening command process (S6409) will now be described with reference to FIG. 78(a). FIG. 78(a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing. This opening command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the opening command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the opening command process, first, the opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). Thereafter, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and based on the set opening display data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S6703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6705), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description is continued. In the processing of S6408, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S6408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command in the unprocessed commands (S6410), and display If there is a round number command for use (S6410: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S6411), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the round number command processing (S6411) will now be described with reference to FIG. 78(b). FIG. 78(b) is a flow chart showing the round number command processing. The number-of-rounds command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the number-of-rounds command for display received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S6802).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6801, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6804). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6805), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description continues. In the processing of S6410, if it is determined that there is no command for the number of rounds for display (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an ending command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6412). If there is an ending command for (S6412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the ending command process (S6413) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing ending command processing. This ending command process is to execute the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the ending command process, first, the ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the ending command for display is determined, the determined ending display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6901). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S6902).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S6904). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6905), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description is continued. In the processing of S6412, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S6412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display fluctuation stop command among the unprocessed commands (S6414), and display If there is a fluctuation stop command (S6414: Yes), the fluctuation stop command process is executed (S6415), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, the details of the fluctuation stop command process (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80(a) is a flow chart showing the fluctuation stop command process. This fluctuation stop command process is for executing a process corresponding to the display fluctuation stop command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

This display fluctuation stop command is the end timing of the display fluctuation pattern command set in the fluctuation display setting process (see S4112 in FIG. 73) of the audio lamp control device 113, that is, each special symbol in the main control device 110 At the end timing of the variation pattern (variation time) set in the variation pattern setting process (the timing at which the main controller 110 sets the stop command), the stop command for display output from the audio lamp control device 113 ( normal stop command) and various display commands set in the fluctuation stop processing (see S4217 in FIG. 70) of the audio lamp control device 113. FIG.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to independently (parallelly) execute the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol. , When one of the special symbols is stopped (fixed) in a pattern indicating a specific lottery result (for example, a big win), the other special symbol during fluctuation is displayed at the end of a predetermined fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time). Regardless of the presence or absence of , it is configured to forcibly stop display with a symbol indicating the disconnection.

And, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command set when forcibly stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol from the main control device 110, the fluctuation stop processing (see S4217 in FIG. 70) is executed. , a display command (forced stop command).

In this embodiment, even if the above-described normal stop command has already been received, if the third symbol or the fourth symbol is not stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, It is configured to execute a stop indication based on a forced stop command received later. That is, the forced stop command is processed with priority over the normal stop command. As a result, the third pattern and the fourth pattern can be reliably displayed in a display mode corresponding to the control contents of the main controller 110 .

In addition, the fluctuation stop command for display includes a display command indicating a temporary stop set in the fluctuation stop processing (see S4214 in FIG. 65) of the sound lamp control device 113. When a (temporary stop command for display) is received, a data table in which display data in which a symbol to be stopped and displayed slightly fluctuates is set as fluctuation stop display data is determined.

In the fluctuation stop command process, first, the fluctuation stop data table indicated by the display fluctuation stop command is determined, and the decided fluctuation stop data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d ( S6931). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents thereof are cleared (S6932).

Next, based on the fluctuation stop data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6931, time data representing the presentation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6933), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S6934). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6935), the fluctuation stop command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description is continued. In the processing of S6412, if it is determined that there is no fluctuation stop command (S6414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display notification command among the unprocessed commands (S6416), and the display notification If there is a command (S6416: Yes), the notification command process for display is executed (S6417), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the notification command process (S6415) will now be described with reference to FIG. 80(b). FIG. 80(b) is a flowchart showing notification command processing. In this notification command processing, processing corresponding to the notification command (for display) received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

This notification command is output to the display control device 114 among various notification commands set when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command for indicating various abnormal states set by the main controller 110. This process is executed when the display control device 114 receives the display notification command.

In the notification command process, first, the display (notification) data table corresponding to the notification mode indicated by the notification command is determined, the determined display (notification) data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and stored in the display data table buffer. 233d (S6951). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents thereof are cleared (S6952).

Next, based on the display (notification) data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6951, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6953), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6954). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6955), the notification command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the present embodiment, the display control device 114 discriminates only the display command indicating that the notification target is the third symbol display device 81 (display device) among the various notification commands set by the sound lamp control device 113. However, it is not limited to this, and related commands other than the display command, such as a light emission command, a voice output command, and a character object driving command, are once received and processed by the display control device 114. It may be configured such that the related command is output to the corresponding control device in a state in which information for indicating the data content (display mode) set in 1 is added.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description is continued. In the process of S6416, if it is determined that there is no display notification command (S6416: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6418). If there is a change command (S6418: Yes), back image change command processing is executed (S6419), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the back image change command process (S6419) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81(a) is a flow chart showing back image change command processing. The back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the back image change command processing, first, the back image change flag 233w for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S7503) of the change in the back image accompanying the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S7001). ). Then, among the bits of the back image determination flag 233x provided for each back image type (back surface A, B), the bit corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is set to ON, and the other bits are set to ON. The bit corresponding to the back image type is set to OFF (S7002), the back image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag 233w set by the process of S7001 is turned on, the back image type after change is selected from the back image discrimination flag 233x set by the process of S7002. Identify.

Further, in the task processing, if it is specified to display one of the back faces A and B according to the back face type of the back face image defined in the display data table, from the back face image determination flag 233x set in S7002, The type of background image to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the background image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type ( Resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for 20 milliseconds or less, two or more background image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should be no cases where two or more background image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. It could be interpreted as a command. In the process of S7002, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the back image determination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image determination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S6418, if it is determined that there is no back image change command (S6418: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6420). Otherwise (S6420: Yes), the error command process is executed (S6421), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the error command processing (S6421) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81(b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. In this error command processing, processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S7101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S7102). End the processing and return to the command determination processing.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7101, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S7102, and the error type is handled. A process is executed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image to be displayed.

If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the process of S7102 sets on error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the people involved in the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence of the error.

Now, return to the description of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S6416 that there is no error command (S6420: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S6422), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

In the process of S6401, which is executed again after each command has been processed, it is again determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes ), and the processing of S6402 to S6422 is executed again. Then, the processing of S6401 to S6422 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75(b)) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary to display the power-on image, that is, the display fluctuation pattern command and the display stop type command, are extracted from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. It extracts and executes fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 77(a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 77(b)), which are processing corresponding to each command, and for other commands, A process to discard the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 77(a)) executed in this case, in the processing of S6501, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on varying image which are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, the process of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, details of the display setting process (S6303), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84. FIG. FIG. 82 is a flow chart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 82, first, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7201). ), it is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination processing to be executed first, the processing of S7202 to S7204 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is ON (S7201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination processing, and after setting the new command flag to OFF (S7202), S7203-S7204 , the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

In the process of S7203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S7203). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S7204).

Details of the warning image setting process will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to, and all error determination flags set to ON are displayed. Warning image data for displaying an error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third pattern display device 81 is developed (S7301).

In task processing (S6304), based on the expanded warning image data, the types of sprites (display objects) that make up the warning image are specified, and the display coordinate position, magnification, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite. Determine various parameters necessary for drawing such as

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S7302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the warning image setting process (S7204), or if it is determined in the process of S7203 that the error occurrence flag is not ON, that is, it is OFF (S7203: No), then the process proceeds to S7205.

In S7205, pointer update processing is executed (S7205). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer updating process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is the process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to which it should be applied.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7401). That is, the pointer 233f is basically updated so that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H". When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S7401, it is then checked whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is End information. is determined (S7402). As a result, if it is End information (S7402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the substance data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S7403). The time data corresponding to the performance time of the display data table for demonstration set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S7404), the pointer 233f is initialized by setting it to 1 (S7405), and this processing ends. and return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effects.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7403 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S7406), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is displayed. is always expanded, the third pattern display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S7402: No), this process ends and returns to the display setting process.

Here, returning to FIG. 82, the description is continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are obtained from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In the task processing (S6304), the type of the sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the rendering content developed in the processing of S7206 together with the previously developed warning image, etc., and each sprite , determine various parameters necessary for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification ratio, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S7207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7208). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S7208: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the fixed display flag is on. (S7209).

As a result, if the confirmed display flag is off (S7209: No), the confirmed display effect has not yet been performed, and it is time to perform the confirmed display effect. The transfer data table buffer 233e is set (S7210), and then the content is cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7211). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the fixed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S7214), the content of the stop symbol discrimination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7215), returns to V interrupt processing.

Thus, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. You can set the drawing contents like this. In addition, only by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the fixed display data table, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect. In addition, compared to the conventional case of changing the display contents by activating another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 is not overloaded. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114 .

It should be noted that the last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before, and in the variable display data table, the variation based on the data table Until a predetermined time elapses after the start, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before is described. In the task processing (S6304), until a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation, from the last stop design determination flag set by S7215, the stop design of the fluctuation production performed one before is specified, and the The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the processing of S7209, if the fixed display flag is on (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (S7216). Then, if the demonstration display flag is off (S7216: No), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the fixed display effect. After that, a process for displaying a demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

First, the demonstration display data table is obtained and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7217), and the contents thereof are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7218). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7220), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7221), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the fixed display effect is completed, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加, you can set its drawing contents.

In the process of S7216, if the demonstration display flag is ON (S7216: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the fixed display effect is finished, and that demonstration effect is finished, so the display setting process is finished as it is. and return to V interrupt processing. In this case, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

The simple display setting process (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75(b)) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on variable images corresponding to the stop pattern set based on the stop type command for display is displayed for a predetermined time after the effect time of the power-on variable image ends. A process of setting a display data table specifying that the image is to be displayed still in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86, the details of the transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 85(a) is a flow chart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. Processing is executed (S7502), the transfer setting processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not turned on as a result of the processing of S7501, that is, if it is turned off (S7501: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video data. It has been transferred to the RAM 235 . In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 . Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, resident image transfer setting processing (S7502), which is part of the transfer setting processing (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 85(b). FIG. 85B is a flow chart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data has been given to the image controller 237 (S7601). ), and further determines whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S7602). In the processing of S7602, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer processing is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer processing has ended. . If it is determined by the processing in S7602 that the transfer processing has not ended (S7602: No), the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7602: Yes), the process proceeds to S7603. Also, as a result of the processing of S7601, even if a transfer instruction for untransferred image data has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process proceeds to S7603.

In the process of S7603, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S7603). A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so as to transfer the resident target image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and this processing ends.

As a result, the transfer data information about the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (where the data is transferred). The first address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores it in the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use. , it is transferred to the specified address of the resident video RAM 235 . Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

As a result of the process of S7603, if all the resident target image data have been transferred (S7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7605), and this process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 75B), the command is executed instead of the simple command determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. Since determination processing (see FIGS. 76 to 81) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 82 to 84) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 displays A normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) (see S7501: No in FIG. 85(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers all resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without overwriting while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 , the image drawing process can be performed. As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow when drawing the image. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third designs, character designs, and error messages, as well as main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113, and display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is immediately resident after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be prevented. , high responsiveness can be maintained until the third pattern display device 81 displays some kind of image.

Next, referring to FIG. 86, normal image transfer setting processing (S7503), which is part of the transfer setting processing (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 86 is a flow chart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7205) of the previously executed display setting process (S6303) is used. Information described in the indicated address is obtained (S7701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S7702). , and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S7703), furthermore, a transfer start flag, which is provided in the work RAM 233 and indicates that there is image data whose transfer is to be started in the ON state, is set to ON (S7704), and the process proceeds to S7705.

In addition, in the process of S7702, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but Null data (S7702: No), the process of S7703 and S7704 is skipped and the process proceeds to S7705. In the process of S7705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S7705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S7705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S7706).

In the process of S7706, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the process of S7706 that the transfer process has not ended (S7706: No), the image transfer process continues in the image controller 237, so this normal image transfer setting process is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7706: Yes), the process proceeds to S7707. Also, as a result of the process of S7705, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S7705: No), the process proceeds to S7707.

In the process of S7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7707). If the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), image data to be transferred exists, so is turned off (S7708), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S7703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the processing proceeds to S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on, but off (S7707: No), then it is determined whether or not the back image change flag 233w is on (S7709). Then, if the back image change flag 233w is not on but off (S7709: No), there is no image data to start transferring, so the normal image transfer setting process ends.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag 233w is on (S7709: Yes), it means that the back image has been changed. Of the back image determination flags 233x, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag 233x in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S7711). Furthermore, the head address (storage source head address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag 233x in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination ( The start address of the normal video RAM 236) is obtained (S7712), and the process proceeds to S7713.

In the process of S7713, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). The determination in the process of S7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is normal video If it is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is "OFF", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

If the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S7713 (S7713: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can be planned.

On the other hand, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S7713 (S7713: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S7714). As a result, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 receives the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the image to be transferred, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, the transfer destination). The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). forward to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

After the processing of S7714, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S7715), and this normal transfer setting processing ends. The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by, as described above, setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the image data to be transferred to "ON", and by substituting the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are to be stored in the area to "off".

By executing the normal image transfer processing in this way, the processing corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination processing. When the displayed stop type information is determined to be a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination processing, the image data used for the back image is stored in the back image of the resident video RAM 235 . Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. , a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. By executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sends data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. can be done.

Here, the transfer data table stores the image data to be transferred so that the image data corresponding to the given sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the given sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, whereby the predetermined address is obtained according to the display data table. image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load on transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 87, details of the drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 87 is a flow chart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in task processing (S6304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information , color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305), a drawing list (FIG. 27) is generated (S7801). That is, in the processing of S7801, the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites forming one frame determined in the task processing (S6304). Then, parameters necessary for the sprite determined by task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in order from the sprite that should be placed on the backmost side to the sprite that should be placed on the front side in the image for one frame. As drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which sprite image data is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. If a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the top address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored as the transfer data information is displayed at the end of the drawing list. , the final address (storage source final address), and the top address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite. , according to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws the image in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list, and develops it by overwriting in the frame buffer indicated by the drawing object buffer information. As a result, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the first-drawn sprite can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the last-drawn sprite can be arranged on the frontmost side.

When transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. ), and the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the head address of the storage source to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a are sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 after that, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing object buffer information, and sends the image information along with the drive signal to the third pattern display device 81. Send to As a result, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Further, while expanding the image drawn in one of the frame buffers, the image drawn from one of the frame buffers can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and drawing processing and display processing are simultaneously processed in parallel. be able to.

In the rendering process, after the process of S7802, the rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated (S7803). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of one frame of image are completed. This is performed each time the rendering process of the loading process (see FIG. 75(b)) is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. is executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for the first half is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By specifying these alternately, it is possible to perform display processing of an image for one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing processing for an image for one frame is being performed. In addition, in the first embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, irrespective of whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, in a state in which one variable display is being performed, other variable displays may be configured to be unexecutable. Then, when there is a reserved ball, it may be configured such that the variable display is executed in order from the reserved ball with the oldest starting prize in terms of time. By configuring in this way, the control can be simplified, so the processing load can be reduced.

As described above, in the first embodiment, normal state (low probability state of special symbols, and normal state of normal symbols), variable state (high probability state of special symbols, and high probability of normal symbols state), time-saving state (low-probability state of special symbols and high-probability state of normal symbols) and latent state (high-probability state of special symbols and normal state of normal symbols) are provided. there is And it is configured so that the latent state is the most advantageous game state for the player.

<Regarding Modified Example of First Embodiment>
In the above-described first embodiment, when the latent state is set, the second special symbol lottery is configured to be easily executed, and when a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, By forcibly stopping the variable first special symbol in a display mode showing the deviation, or by suspending the subtraction of the variable time temporarily (until the small winning game is completed), the second special symbol is displayed. Although the lottery is configured to be easily executed, the configuration is not limited to this, and the following configuration may be used.

The jackpot probability of the special pattern is always constant regardless of the game state, and the first ball entrance that triggers the variation of the first special pattern is arranged at a position where the left-handed game ball can enter, and the right-handed game ball is hit. A right first ball entrance corresponding to the first special symbol and a right second ball entrance corresponding to the second special symbol are arranged in an area where the played game ball can be entered, and the right second ball entrance is arranged. In the mouth, when the game ball passes through the through gate through which the game ball hit to the right can pass, the game ball is opened to the right second ball entrance to make it easier to enter than in the closed state. Arrange and configure the characters.

In the case of the normal game state (low probability, non-electric support (low probability of normal pattern)), the game ball is entered into the first ball entrance where the game is played with the left hand, and the first special symbol is displayed. A lottery is drawn and a game is played. When the lottery result of the first special pattern becomes a jackpot, the probability of the normal pattern becomes high after the jackpot game, and the electric accessory is likely to be in an open state (a game state with an electric sapo), the game is played by hitting to the right. By performing, it is possible to play the game by entering the game ball into the right first ball entrance and the right second ball entrance, and the lottery game of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed at the same time. It becomes possible to be In the second special pattern, the probability of winning a small prize is set higher than in the first special pattern, and a small prize game is executed in which the V prize area is opened to the V prize device formed in the variable prize device. It is structured so that it is easy to In addition, when the small win B (small win A and small win B are set) is executed, the first special symbol in fluctuation is forcibly terminated (forcibly set to the result of determination of loss). It is

Here, in the modified example, the jackpot game executed by the game ball passing through the V prize area by the small win game is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot game executed by the first special symbol jackpot. It is set with a big hit. Here, in the big win executed by passing the game ball through the V winning area, the selection ratio of the big win in which the time-saving game state is set after the big win game is set higher than the big win of the first special symbol. It should be noted that the number of rounds may be set to be greater than the number of first special symbol jackpots so that the jackpots executed through the V winning area are advantageous.

In this way, even in a so-called one-type and two-type gaming machine, by forcibly stopping the fluctuation of the big win that is disadvantageous to the player with one small win or big win, it is advantageous to the player. A jackpot can be given easily.

<Second embodiment>
Next, a second embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 100. FIG. In the second embodiment, the type of game state set according to the lottery result of the special symbol, the configuration of the main control device 110, and the configuration of the sound lamp control device 113 are different from the first embodiment. are different.

In the above-described first embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 12 to 14, the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is different depending on the jackpot type won. Specifically, the jackpot A, which is won only in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), is set to a variable probability state after the jackpot game is finished, and the jackpot B and jackpot C are set to the probability state after the jackpot game is finished. be done. Then, the jackpot D to be won in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is configured to be set to a latent state after the jackpot game ends.

Also, as described above, the first embodiment is a gaming machine (so-called simultaneous variation machine) that simultaneously (in parallel) executes the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol. ), and if a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special pattern, the lottery of the first special pattern is discarded (forced stop due to loss) or interrupted (temporary stop) according to the small hit type. It is configured to

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, regardless of the type of the winning jackpot, when the jackpot is won with the first special symbol, the variable probability state is set after the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, when the first special symbol jackpot is won during the variable probability state, the latent probability state is set as the game state at the start of the variation, and the small winning game (small winning RUSH) is set.

Here, with reference to FIG. 88, the game flow in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 88 is a timing chart showing an example of the flow of the game when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) in a state where the variable probability state is set. As shown in FIG. 88, in the second embodiment, when the jackpot is elected in a state in which the variable probability state is set, the timing at which the jackpot variation starts (see FIG. 88 (c)), and either A latent definite state is set in the period (symbol confirmation period) until the special symbol jackpot game is executed.

Then, in the state in which the latent certainty state is set, a game for drawing the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed in the same manner as in the above-described first embodiment. In addition, when winning the special figure 2 small hit during the special figure 1 pattern fluctuation, the measurement (subtraction) of the special figure 1 pattern fluctuation time is interrupted (temporary stop) or , is configured to be discarded (forced stop due to disconnection). In addition, in the second embodiment, according to the jackpot type of the first special symbol, a different variable time is easily set. Therefore, depending on the selected variation pattern, there is a possibility that the small winning of the second special symbol cannot interrupt or cancel the big winning variation. As a result, the player desires that a long period of time be set as the period in which the latent state is set, and therefore desires that a variation pattern with a long variation period be selected.

As shown in FIG. 88, when the probability variable state is set after the end of the jackpot game, a screen for informing the player that the game state will be in the probability variable state (challenge mode) at the end of the jackpot is displayed as the first screen. It is displayed on the 3-symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 88(a)).

Here, with reference to FIG. 89(a), the display contents of the end screen (ending screen) of the jackpot game will be described. FIG. 89(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of the end screen (ending screen) of the jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 89(a), on the ending screen of the jackpot game, a comment "entering the challenge mode!!" indicating that the variable probability state is set after the jackpot game ends is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. In the main display area Dm, a character 811 that is displayed during the period in which the variable probability state or the latent probability state is set is displayed. This character 811 is configured so as not to appear (not be displayed) during the period in which the normal state is set. A game state advantageous to the player (a game state more advantageous than the normal state) is set.

Also, a comment "Aim for RUSH!!" is displayed in the main display area Dm to aim for setting the potential state. Further, in the guidance display area Dm3 of the main display area Dm, characters of "left-handed" are displayed as a guidance display mode for causing the player to play a left-handed game. This makes it possible for the player to easily grasp that the left side game aiming at the left side area is performed when the variable probability state is set.

Further, in the small display area Dm1, "555" is displayed as a display mode corresponding to the jackpot game currently being executed (while the ending screen is being displayed). In addition, "-" is displayed in the special figure 2 display area Dm2 as a non-variable display mode indicating that the second special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner. In the small display area Dm1a and the small display area Dm2a, "0" indicating that there are no reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed.

Returning to FIG. 88, the description continues. In the state where the variable probability state is set as the game state (see FIG. 88(b)), the game state is such that the first special symbol lottery can be easily executed by the left-handed game. In other words, the variable probability state is a state in which the electric accessory 64a is easily opened since the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, and the ball is easily entered into the lower first ball entrance 64b2.

The contents of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during this variable probability state will be described with reference to FIG. 89(b). FIG. 89(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of the display screen during the variable probability state. As shown in FIG. 89(b), a comment "in the chance zone" indicating that the current gaming state is a variable probability state is displayed so as to scroll horizontally (right to left) in the sub-display area Ds. be.

In the main display area Dm, an effect is displayed in which the character 811 moves (runs) in the horizontal direction (from left to right). Then, "Left-handed" is displayed in the guide display area Dm3, and an in-varying display indicating that the first special symbol is in the process of being changed is displayed in the small display area Dm1. It should be noted that, even at this time point, the second special symbol is not newly changed from the state shown in FIG. , Non-varying display mode "-" is continuously displayed in the special figure 2 display area Dm2.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, a plurality of operation display patterns of the character 811 are stored in the variable probability state, and the lottery result of the first special symbol in the variable probability state (result of determination ), the action display pattern of the character 811 is set differently. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol wins the jackpot during the variable probability state.

Returning to FIG. 88, the description continues. After the display screen shown in FIG. 89(b) is displayed, when the variable display for showing that the lottery result of the first special symbol has won the jackpot is executed, the display shown in FIG. 90(a) is executed. A screen appears. FIG. 90(a) is a schematic diagram showing the display contents displayed when the variable display of winning the jackpot is started in the variable probability state. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the gaming state is changed at the timing when the variable display indicating that the first special symbol has won the jackpot during the probability variable state is started (see FIG. 88(c)). It is configured to shift from the definite variable state to the latent definite state.

Therefore, at the timing when the variation of the first special symbol starts, the game state shifts to a state (potential state) advantageous to the player, so that the variation display of the first special symbol is performed in the small display area Dm1 of the display screen. While the variable display mode indicating that the game is being executed is displayed, the display mode (the display mode of "333") of the effect symbol 816 (the display mode of "333") for indicating to the player that the game state has changed is stopped and displayed. . As a result, the player can be made to think that the game state has shifted from the variable definite state to the latent definite state due to the stopped display of the performance symbol 816.例文帳に追加In addition, in the present second embodiment, since the same display mode as the display mode of the third pattern is used as the performance symbol display mode, the stop-displayed performance symbol display mode indicates the lottery result of the special symbol. It can be made to think that it is a display mode of Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment "Rush into RUSH!! Hit right!!" is displayed to indicate that the latent state is set as the game state.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the effect pattern displayed in the main display area Dm is stopped without changing the effect mode of the special figure 1 display area Dm1 at the start of the variation of the first special symbol that has been won in the big hit. Since it is configured to be displayed, the player can be made to think that the game state has changed according to the lottery result of the performance symbols.

Then, when winning a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol during the latent state in which the right-handed game is continuously executed (during the big hit fluctuation of the first special symbol), it is shown in FIG. 90 (b). As you can see, an effect mode is displayed to indicate that a small win has been won. Here, with reference to FIG. 90(b), the display contents when the latent state is set will be described. FIG. 90(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of the display screen during the latent state.

According to FIG. 90(b), while the latent state is set (during RUSH), if a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, the small display area Dm1 is fluctuating. ``541'' indicating the display mode for suggesting that the variation of the 1 special symbol has been discarded (forced stop due to loss) is displayed, and the special figure 2 display area Dm2 indicates that a small hit has been won. The display mode "246" is displayed. Furthermore, in the small display area Dm7, "Vx3" indicating the number of winnings of the small winnings is displayed, and in the small display area Dm8, the elapsed time since this latency state is set is displayed "01:50". be done.

Then, a treasure box 817 displayed as an effect mode during RUSH is opened, and a "V" for indicating a small win is displayed as an effect symbol 818 for indicating the game result from inside. As a result, it is possible to inform the player that a small hit is won with the second special symbol during the latent state (during RUSH) and that a small hit game is executed.

Also, a star mark 819 is displayed around the production pattern 818 . This asterisk 819 is a display mode indicating that the game is forced to stop due to the small winning of this time out of the big winning variation that results in the winning of a big winning that is disadvantageous to the player. By configuring in this way, the player can obtain a sense of relief and can concentrate more on the right-handed game.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the configuration is such that the star 819 is displayed in order to show the variation result of the first special symbol. 818 may be variably displayed. Moreover, it may be configured to display not only the variation result but also the remaining variation period of the discarded first special symbol. By configuring in this way, various effects can be provided to the player.

Furthermore, in order to inform the player of the state of the first special symbol in the latent definite state in an easy-to-understand manner, the performance contents are varied and displayed according to the state such as the first special symbol being non-fluctuation, losing fluctuation, big hit fluctuation, and the like. You may For example, the color of the guide display of "Right-handed" in the small display area Dm3 may be changed or displayed blinking. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a game that is easier for the player to understand.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the right second variable winning device 650 that rotates when a small win is won is provided in the right region, and the same game method (right hitting) as during the latent certainty state is used. It is configured to play games. By configuring in this way, even if the small winning game is frequently executed during the latent certainty state, the player only needs to continue the right-handed game, so that the player can be provided with a game that is easy to understand. can.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when the first special symbol jackpot variation is started during the probability variation state, the latent probability state is set from the start of the jackpot variation, and the latent state is set. In the state where the sure state is set, it is configured so that the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) can be efficiently performed.

Therefore, at the same time when the latent certainty state is set (based on the fact that the latent certainty state is set), the player is notified of the period during which the latent certainty state is set (Fig. 90 (a ))reference. However, since the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment is capable of simultaneously varying the first special symbol and the second special symbol, in a state in which the variable probability state is set, the first special symbol is also Both of the second special symbols may also fluctuate.

In such a case, even if a display mode indicating that the latent certainty state (RUSH) has been set is displayed (see FIG. 90(a)) at the timing when the latent certainty state has been set, the currently fluctuating second A lottery for the second special symbol cannot be executed during the latent definite state until the special symbol stops fluctuating, and a problem arises that the small winning game is not executed for a long time even during the RUSH state. There was fear.

Therefore, in the second embodiment, when the transition condition to the latent state is established (when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol during the variable state), the fluctuation situation of the second special symbol (variation of presence/absence, fluctuation remaining period), and based on the result of the determination, the timing of announcing that the RUSH state has been set is varied.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 88 and 91, when the transition condition to the latent definite state is established (when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery during the definite variable state), the second special symbol ( I will explain the content of the production when the special figure 2) is fluctuating. As shown in FIG. 88, when the second special symbol is fluctuating at the time when the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is started in the state in which the probability variation state is set (see FIG. 88 (c)), the probability variation Rather than the "challenge mode" for indicating the state, a "super challenge mode" with a higher degree of expectation that the RUSH state will be set is displayed.

When the "super-challenge mode" is set, a comment indicating the "super-challenge mode" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. In the main display area Dm, the character 811 is displayed moving faster than that shown in FIG.

Then, in the small display area Dm1, a "variation display mode" for showing that the first special symbol is in the process of being varied is displayed, and in the small display area Dm2, before the latent state is set. The "variation display mode" which is being changed from the time point is displayed.

Returning to FIG. 88, the description continues. The display screen of "super challenge mode" shown in FIG. 91 (a) is displayed until the timing when the special figure 2 variation executed across the timing of shifting the game state from the probability variable state to the latent probability state ends, When the special figure 2 fluctuation ends (see FIG. 88(d)), a "RUSH" rush screen is displayed to inform the player that the game has entered "RUSH" (see FIG. 91(b)).

Here, with reference to FIG. 91(b), the contents of the screen entered into "RUSH" via the "super challenge mode" will be described. FIG. 91(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a screen that enters "RUSH" via "super challenge mode". As shown in FIG. 91(b), in the main display area Dm, a display pattern 813 is displayed from a treasure box 817 to inform the player that the game has entered "RUSH". Then, "Right shot" is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3 to guide the game method during the rush game. At this time, the special figure 1 display area Dm1 displays a variation display mode for suggesting that the first special symbol is fluctuating (during the jackpot variation), and the special figure 2 display area Dm2 shows the deviation. The display mode "435" is stopped and displayed.

Returning to FIG. 88, the description continues. During the rush game (during the RUSH), that is, during the latent state, a game is executed in which the lottery of the second special symbol in which the variation pattern with the short variation time is set is frequently performed by performing the right-handed game. .

Therefore, during the rush game, it is possible to win a small hit with a probability of 1/2, and to interrupt or cancel the fluctuation of the first special symbol by the small win game. However, when the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is started, the variation pattern is different depending on the type of the jackpot. Therefore, when a short variation pattern is selected, the jackpot variation is discarded by the small win. Can not do it. As a result, the player is prevented from winning a disadvantageous jackpot in the rush game, and can execute the rush game while pounding whether or not he can win the most advantageous jackpot.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 and 93. FIG. The second embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in that the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 are changed. Other points are the same as those of the first embodiment, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 92 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probability variation/potential probability table 202ad2 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 92, the probability variation/potential probability table 202ad2 is the same jackpot operation as the jackpot type defined in the probability variation/potential probability table 202d (see FIG. 14(a)) of the first embodiment described above. The contents are defined, and the setting contents of the time saving flag 203m and the probability variation flag 203g are defined for each jackpot type.

And it is different in that the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is different for the jackpot B and the jackpot C of the variable probability/potential probability table 202ad2 of the first embodiment described above. Specifically, the big win B and the big win C are configured such that the time saving flag 203m is set to OFF, and the latent state is set after the big win game ends. In the 2nd Embodiment of this invention, it comprises so that the time saving flag 203m may be set to ON. That is, in the second embodiment, when the first special symbol jackpot is won when the probability variable state or the latent probability state is set, after the jackpot game ends, regardless of the jackpot type After the jackpot game ends A variable state is set.

Next, referring to FIG. 93, the contents of the probability variation 2 table 202ae2 will be described. FIG. 93 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probability variation 2 table 202ae2 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 93, the time saving/probability variable table 202ae2 is different from the time saving/probability variable table 202e2 (see FIG. 17(a)) of the first embodiment described above. They are different in that they differ in Other than that is the same as the time saving/probability variation table 202f2 (see FIG. 19(a)). A detailed description of the same elements is omitted.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 93, the lottery result of the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1) is "jackpot A", and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 159" A short fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 0.1 seconds is defined in association with the range of "160 to 196", and a middle fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 2 seconds is defined in association with the range of "197 to 198". A long variation with a time of 600 seconds is associated and defined.

In the second embodiment, as described above, when the jackpot in the first special symbol is won during the variable probability state, the latent probability state is set as the game state and the right-handed game is executed. And, if you win the "jackpot A" during the variable state, the short variation (0.1 seconds) is likely to be selected as the variation pattern, and even if you quickly execute the special figure 2 game, it is almost certainly the first You will win a special pattern jackpot. Therefore, jackpot A is the jackpot that is the most disadvantageous to the player.

Next, the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1), the lottery result is "jackpot B", and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 4", and the variation time is 0.1 seconds. A short fluctuation is defined in correspondence, a middle fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 2 seconds is defined in the range of "5 to 41", and a long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 600 seconds is defined in the range of "42 to 198". It is stipulated with

In the jackpot B, it is configured so that the middle variation is likely to be selected as the variation pattern. And, as described above, the variation pattern of the second special symbol in the latent state is set to 1 second regardless of the lottery result (see FIG. 17(b)). It is a jackpot that is easy to discard.

Next, the lottery result of the first special symbol (special figure 1) of the symbol type is "jackpot C", and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 1" and the variation time is 0.1 seconds. A short fluctuation is defined in correspondence, a middle fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 2 seconds is defined in the range of "2 to 5", and a long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 600 seconds is defined in the range of "6 to 198". It is stipulated with

As described above, when the jackpot C is won, the long variation of 600 seconds is likely to be executed as the variation pattern. During the long fluctuation of 600 seconds, the second special symbol is changed for 1 second, and the small win is won with a probability of 1/2, so that the big win can be surely discarded and the jackpot is the easiest to discard. It is a type.

Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the game flow of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 94 is a game flow showing the flow of the game according to the second embodiment. This second embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in that when the game state is the variable probability state and the variation of the jackpot is started in the lottery of the first special symbol, it shifts to the 100% latent state. do. Since other game flows are the same as in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the control process executed by the main controller in the second embodiment>
Next, referring to FIGS. 95 to 99, the control processing executed by main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described with respect to the control processing executed by main controller 110 in the above-described first embodiment. The explanation will focus on the differences between the two. The second embodiment differs greatly from the above-described first embodiment in that it is possible to set the probability variable state to the latent probability state as the game state when the first special symbol starts to fluctuate.

Here, with reference to FIG. 95, the contents of the first special symbol variation start process 2 (S231) will be described. FIG. 95 is a flow chart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation start process 2 (S231). This first special symbol variation start process 2 (S231) is the first special symbol big hit determination process 2 (S331) in contrast to the first special symbol variation start process (see S210 in FIG. 30) of the first embodiment described above. , and after executing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307), the difference is that the game state update process (S332) is executed. We omit the explanation.

Next, with reference to FIG. 96, the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S331), which is one process in the first special symbol variation start process 2 (S231), will be described. FIG. 96 is a flow chart showing the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S331). This first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S331) is different from the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S306 in FIG. 31) of the first embodiment described above. , the game state is set to the latent certainty state, and the rest is the same.

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S331), after obtaining the current lottery result in the process of S403 or S404, it is determined whether the jackpot flag 203n for the second special symbol is ON (S451). When it is determined that the jackpot flag 203n is ON (S451: Yes), the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a lost symbol (S409), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 big hit flag 203n is not ON in the process of S451 (S451: No), it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol this time is a big hit (S405). If it is determined to be a jackpot (S405: Yes), the above-described processing of S406 to S408 is executed, then the time saving flag 203m is set to OFF (S452), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 97, the contents of the game state update process (S332), which is one process in the first special symbol variation start process 2 (S231), will be described. FIG. 97 is a flow chart showing the contents of the game state update process (S332). This game state update process (S332) updates the game state when the first special symbol starts to fluctuate, and executes a process of setting a command to be sent to the sound lamp control device.

In the game state update process (S332), first, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag 203m is ON (S651). When it is determined that the time saving flag 203m is ON (S651: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving flag 203m is not ON (S651: No), it is determined whether the variable probability flag 203g is ON (S652). When it is determined that the variable probability flag 203g is ON (S652: Yes), a state command indicating a latent probability state is set (S653), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variable probability flag 203g is not ON (S652: No), a state command indicating a normal state is set (S654), and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 98, the contents of the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S232) will be described. FIG. 98 is a flow chart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S232). The first special symbol variation stop processing 2 (S232) does not execute the special figure 2 temporary stop processing (S803) for the first special symbol variation stop processing (S209 in FIG. 34), and the special figure 2 jackpot is not executed (S809 to S811). Other than that, since they are the same, they are denoted by the same reference numerals and their description is omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 99, the contents of the jackpot ending process 2 (S2551) will be described. FIG. 99 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot ending process 2 (S2551). In contrast to the jackpot end processing (S2512) of the first embodiment described above, jackpot end processing 2 (S2551) wins any one of jackpot A, jackpot B, or jackpot C when the gaming state is in the latent state. Then, the difference is that the process of setting the probability change state is executed. Other than that, since they are the same, they are denoted by the same reference numerals and their description is omitted.

In the jackpot end process 2 (S2551), after executing the above-described processes of S2701 to S2704, it is determined whether or not the gaming state at the time of winning is the potential state (S2751). When it is determined that the game state is the potential state (S2751: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current jackpot type is D (S2752). If the jackpot type this time is the jackpot D (S2752: Yes), the time saving flag 203m is set to off in order to set the latent state in the gaming state (S2753), and the probability variation flag 203g is set to on ( S2754), sets a command indicating a change in the game state (S2709), and terminates this process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot type this time is not D (S2752: No), the time saving flag 203m and the probability variation flag 203g are set to ON in order to set the probability variation state in the gaming state (S2706). The process of S2709 is executed, and this process ends.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the second embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 100, the control processing executed by the audio ramp control device 113 in the second embodiment is compared with the control processing executed by the audio ramp control device 113 in the above-described first embodiment. The explanation will focus on the points of difference. The control processing executed by the audio ramp control device 113 of the present second embodiment is different from the control processing executed by the audio ramp control device 113 of the first embodiment described above. 100) in that the fluctuation stop processing 2 (see S4251 in FIG. 100) is executed instead. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 100, the fluctuation stopping process 2 (S4251) executed by the audio ramp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. In the fluctuation stop process 2 (S4251), in contrast to the fluctuation stop process (S4214) of the first embodiment, when the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command is received during the latent state, the display corresponding to the lottery result of this time The difference is that a command setting process (S4751) is added. By constructing in this way, the lottery result of the forcedly stopped first special symbol can be conveyed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. Other than that, since they are the same, they are denoted by the same reference numerals and their description is omitted.

In the second embodiment described above, the game state is a variable probability state, and if the jackpot is elected due to the fluctuation of the first special symbol during the variable probability state, at the start of the fluctuation (at the start of the jackpot fluctuation), time saving By setting the flag 203m to OFF, a latent state is set, and a small hit RUSH for executing a small hit game is set until the fluctuation of the first special symbol is completed.

Also, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is won and the latent certainty state is set, a special figure 2 game (right-handed game) is executed. By winning the second special pattern jackpot, it is possible to temporarily stop the first special pattern jackpot variation or to forcibly stop the change until the second special pattern jackpot is won. Alternatively, the latent state is set until the fluctuation stops without being able to discard the big hit fluctuation of the first special symbol.

In addition to such a configuration, set the probability variable end conditions and latent probability end conditions (for example, the number of fluctuations of special figure 1, the number of fluctuations of special figure 2, the number of small hit executions, etc.), and when the conditions are met, It may be configured to end the latent state and transition to the normal state. In addition, the end condition (for example, the number of fluctuations remaining until the latent probability end condition) is notified to the player, the player judges the game situation, and the special figure 2 game to special figure 1 game (left-handed game) may be configured to switch to. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a variety of playability and improve the interest of the game.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, a third embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 101 to 112. FIG. In the third embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the configuration of the game board 13, the type of game state set according to the special symbol lottery result, the configuration of the main controller 110, and the sound lamp control The configuration of the device 113 is different.

In the above-described first embodiment, it is configured to win a small hit only in the second special symbol lottery, and when a specific small win (small hit A) is won (a special symbol is displayed in a display mode indicating a small win) In the case of stop display), the changing first special symbol is forcibly stopped in a display mode showing a failure, and when another small win (small win B) is won, the changing first special symbol changes. It was configured to interrupt time subtraction.

When the latent state is set as the game state, the lottery for the second special symbol is easily executed, and by frequently generating small wins during the latent state, the player is encouraged. It was configured to be able to award prize balls. Furthermore, in the first embodiment, it is constructed such that after winning a jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbols and the jackpot game is executed, it is easy to shift to the latent state, and the number of times the latent state is set has an upper limit. is provided, and when the upper limit is reached, the normal state is set regardless of the type of the winning jackpot.

On the other hand, in the third embodiment, a small hit is won in both the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery, and when one special symbol wins a small hit (special When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that the lottery result of the symbol is a small hit, the fluctuation of the other special symbol being executed is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a loss. It consists of

By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to forcibly remove the other special symbol variation by the lottery of any special symbol. Also, since the big winning variation of the second special symbol can be forcibly stopped by winning the small winning of the first special symbol, the big winning game can be prevented from being executed even if the big winning of the special symbol is won.

Furthermore, in the third embodiment, when a specific game state (for example, a latent state) is set, both the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are configured to be easily executed. However, when a specific game state is set, the control for forcibly stopping one big winning variation by winning the other small winning is executed mutually. As a result, it is possible to prevent a specific game state from ending due to winning a jackpot, and to continue the latent certainty state for a long period of time.

In addition, in the third embodiment, it has a plurality of variation pattern tables that are referred to when setting the variation pattern of each special symbol, and the variation patterns defined in each variation pattern table are different. . Specifically, the length of the variation pattern (variation time) set when winning the big win and the length of the variation pattern (variation time) set when winning the small win are made different.

By constructing in this way, even if the probability of winning the big win in the lottery of the special symbols and the probability of winning the small win are the same in the game state, the probability of actually executing the big win game can be varied. can. For example, when referring to a variation pattern table in which a long variation time (for example, 10 minutes) is likely to be set as a variation pattern set as a special symbol variation, a 10-minute jackpot variation is used as one of the special symbol variations. When executed, it becomes possible to execute many other special symbol lotteries during the special symbol variation. Then, when a small win is won in the other special symbol lottery, the big win variation of one special symbol is forcibly stopped, so that the special symbol big win game becomes difficult to be performed. Similarly, when referring to a variation pattern table in which a short variation time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is likely to be set as a variation pattern set as a special symbol jackpot variation, it is executed during the special symbol variation. Since the number of times of lottery for the other special symbol is reduced, the jackpot game of the special symbol is easily performed.

In addition, in the third embodiment, the variation pattern set as the small winning variation of the special symbol can be selected from a plurality of variation patterns (variation time) like the variation pattern set as the big winning variation described above. By setting a short variation time as the variation time of the small winning variation, the big winning game can be easily performed.

Furthermore, in the third embodiment, similarly to the above-described first embodiment, when the latent state is set as the game state, the second special symbol lottery is likely to be executed. Once the latent certainty state is set, the latent certainty state is not terminated unless a special symbol jackpot game is executed. Therefore, by winning a small win in the lottery of each special symbol and suppressing the execution of the big win game, it is possible to play the game in the latent definite state for a long period of time.

In this way, by forcibly stopping (dismissing) the big winning variation of one of the special symbols by winning the small winning of the other special symbol, the game property of continuing the latent definite state advantageous to the player is used. As a result, it is possible to motivate the player to play a game (a game in which special symbols are drawn during the big hit fluctuation) even during the big hit fluctuation, so that the operation of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in the third embodiment, when a display mode for indicating that a small win has been won is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the special game is forcibly stopped by the small win. A suggestive display capable of suggesting the actual lottery result of the symbol variation and the remaining variation time of the special symbol variation to the player can be executed.

Specifically, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, the display variation pattern command to be transmitted to the display control device 114 is set. , A variation information storage means for temporarily storing variation information (lottery result of special symbols, variation time, etc.) included in the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 is provided, and then the special symbol during variation is forced. Of the commands (variation stop command) to stop the game (variation stop command), when the command (variation stop command at the time of the small win) is received to forcibly stop the special symbols that are fluctuating based on the winning of the small win , to the display control device 114, together with a display command for stopping and displaying the changing special symbol in a display mode that forcibly indicates a detachment, the stop variation information is displayed based on the variation information stored in the variation information storage means. Sets the display command to suggest.

Then, when the display control device 114 receives a display command for suggesting stop variation information, for example, an effect display mode based on the actual lottery result of the special symbols forcibly stopped this time is displayed. Specifically, if the lottery result is a big win, the monster character is displayed, and if the lottery result is a small win, a pattern of a treasure box is displayed. In addition, the color of the character of the monster is displayed so as to be changed depending on the type of the jackpot. By configuring in this way, the player can be made to recognize how many times the end of the latent probability variable game state can be avoided by making a small hit.

In addition, in the present embodiment, even at the timing of displaying the display mode ("V pattern") indicating the small hit winning, to suggest the actual lottery information (lottery result, remaining variation time) of the special symbol that is forcibly stopped this time However, the timing of the suggestion display is not limited to this, for example, the timing when the small winning game starts, during the small winning game, or when the small winning game ends It may be configured to be performed at the timing. In addition, a fusion display that fuses the suggestive display and the display for indicating the winning of the small hit may be executed, and game information for showing the result of the small winning game (for example, the number of prize balls and the probability state The number of small winning games executed during) and the suggestive display may be combined.

Also, the above-mentioned suggestive display may be set so that it is easier to execute when the special symbol forcibly stopped this time wins a big win than when it does not win a big win. As a result, even if the special symbols forcibly stopped this time have not won the big win, the player can be made to think that he/she has won the small win at a good timing.

In the third embodiment, similarly to the above-described first embodiment, when a small win is won, there are cases of forcibly stopping the special symbol during fluctuation and cases of temporarily stopping it. In this case, the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is made difficult for the player to determine whether the special symbol variation being executed has been forcibly stopped or temporarily stopped by the small win this time. It is good to set the display mode of .

Next, referring to FIG. 101, the configuration of the game board 13 in the third embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment, only the first ball entrance 64b1 is arranged below the third symbol display device 81, and on the right side of the third symbol display device 81, the right A first ball entrance 64b2 and a second ball entrance 640 are arranged, and on the downstream side thereof, a first variable prize winning device 65, which is in an open state during a jackpot game, and a small variable prize winning device 65 on the right side of the first variable prize winning device 65. A second variable winning device 650 is arranged which is in an open state during a winning game.

In addition, on the right side of the third symbol display device 81, a distribution flow path is formed that can distribute and guide game balls to the right first ball entrance 64b2 and the second ball entrance 640. As shown in FIG. In the upper part of the distribution channel, a game ball is shot to the right (a game method in which a player shoots a game ball with a shooting intensity that allows the game ball to flow down the right side of the third symbol display device 81). A rotating distributing member 700 capable of distributing alternately the played game balls to the first flow path 701 and the second flow path 702 is arranged.

The rotary distribution member 700 is formed with a first receiving portion and a second receiving portion capable of receiving game balls. , alternately facing diagonally upward to the left. The rotation distribution member 700 is configured to rotate about 90 degrees in the left and right direction, and the game that is hit to the right with the first receiving part facing diagonally upward to the left (the state shown in FIG. 101). When the ball enters the first receiving portion, the rotating distribution member 700 rotates 90 degrees in the left direction due to the game ball's own weight, and the game ball is distributed (guided) to the first flow path 701 . When the game ball is distributed to the first flow path 7901 by the rotary distribution member 700, the rotary distribution member 700 is stopped with the second receiving portion directed diagonally upward to the left. Next, the game ball struck to the right enters the second receiving portion, and the rotation distribution member 700 rotates rightward by the weight of the entered game ball, and the second flow path 702 distributes (guides) the game balls in the second receiving section.

In this way, the balls shot in the right-handed game are alternately distributed to the first flow path 701 and the second flow path 702 by the rotating distribution member 700 . The ball distributed to the first flow path 701 passes through the curved path 701a, passes through the through gate 67 and the second ball entrance 640, and flows out downward to the right side area. Further, the balls distributed to the second flow path 702 flow down the third flow path 703a provided on the downstream side thereof, flow into the inlet 704a, and flow into the back side of the first flow path 701 (see FIG. 101). It flows down the fifth flow path 704b provided on the far side in the view point, and flows out to the lower right area on the game board 13 from the outflow port 704c.

The balls distributed to the two flow paths (the first flow path 701 and the second flow path 702) by the rotary distribution member 700 are merged below the right area, and the second variable winning device 650 and the first variable winning device 65 It flows downward and flows into the out port 66 .

Since the rotating distribution member 700 alternately distributes the balls fired by the right-handed game to the first flow path 701 and the second flow path 702, when 100 balls are fired in one minute, the first flow 50 particles are distributed to the channel 701 at intervals of 1.2 seconds, and 50 particles are distributed to the second channel 702 at intervals of 1.2 seconds. The first flow path 701 is composed of a ball passage formed with a passage width of one ball (about 15 mm), and a curved path 701a provided in the middle of the passage reduces the flow speed of the ball. It is configured such that the ball passage time required for the ball flowing into the first flow path 701 to flow out of the first flow path 701 is about 2 seconds.

In the third embodiment, the through gate 67 is provided in the first flow path 701 and the second ball inlet 640 is provided in the second flow path 702 . As a result, it is possible to physically prevent the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 from entering the second ball entrance 640 .

In the game board 13, a normally movable member 1500 is provided along the most upstream ball rolling surface of the first flow path 701, and when the normally movable member 1500 is moved to the open position (open state), the ball is configured to be able to enter the right first ball entrance 64b.

The operation of the constantly movable member 1500 will now be described in detail. The normally movable valve 1500 is configured to be variable between an open position (open state) and a closed position (closed state) at a predetermined timing based on the pachinko machine 10 being powered on. there is Specifically, in the movable member driving process (not shown) executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process of the main controller 110, the operation is controlled based on the movable scenario stored in the ROM 203. FIG. In this movable scenario, the movable member 1500 is constantly opened for 0.1 seconds and then closed for 1.2 seconds, and is repeatedly executed.

That is, in the game board 13 of Modification 1, the ball fired in the right-handed game flows into the first flow path 701 at intervals of 1.2 seconds, and the rolling ball on which the movable member 1500 is always arranged It rolls on the surface and flows downstream. When the timing at which this ball flows into the first flow path 701 and rolls on the constantly movable member 1500 (or falls on the constantly movable member) coincides with the timing at which the constantly movable valve 1500 is in an open state, The ball passes through the normally movable member 1500 in the open state and enters the right first ball entrance 64b.

The timing at which the constantly movable member 1500 rolls (or falls on the constantly movable member) is every 1.2 seconds. Since it is 0.1 second, the timing at which the two coincide is about once every 15.6 seconds. That is, when the right-handed game is continuously executed, about four balls enter the right first ball entrance 64b in one minute.

That is, in a game state in which a right-handed game is continuously executed, such as during a jackpot game or a time-saving game, the ball enters the right first ball entrance 64b periodically, so that the jackpot game is performed. When it ends and shifts to the time saving state, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a state where there is no suspension of special figure 1. In addition, as the period during which the constantly movable valve 1500 is opened once, a period (0.1 second) during which it is difficult for the player to aim is set. A right-handed game can be more disadvantageous to the player than a left-handed game aiming at the mouth 64a.

Specifically, when the game state is the normal state, if a left-handed game is played, about 15 of the 250 balls that are shot will enter the first left ball entrance 64a. It is designed, and five prize balls are paid out when a ball enters. In addition, it is designed so that about five balls enter the general ball entrance 63, and when the balls enter, five prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the left-handed game, when 250 balls are fired, considering that the paid out prize balls are fired again, it is possible to make about 20 balls enter the first left ball entrance 64a. becomes.

On the other hand, when the game state is the normal state, when a right-handed game is played, out of the 250 balls that are shot, about 9 are designed to enter the right first ball entrance 64b. If the ball is entered, two prize balls will be paid out. Moreover, the general ball entrance 63 is not provided in the right area. Therefore, in a right-handed game, when 250 balls are fired, even if it is considered that the paid-out prize balls are fired again, about 10 balls are allowed to enter the right first ball entrance 64b. I can only do it. Therefore, when the game state is the normal state, it is possible to suppress the player from playing the right-handed game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game area (right side area) through which the ball fired by the right-handed game passes is not provided with the general ball entrance 63. The general ball entrance 63 may be provided based on a design concept to the extent that the game is not more advantageous to the player. As a result, the number of balls paid out as prize balls can be increased in the right-handed game during the time-saving state or during the jackpot state.

Next, among the structures arranged in the right region of the game board 13, the through gate 67 and the second ball entrance 640 will be explained, focusing on the differences from the structure of the game board 13 of the first embodiment described above. do.

A through gate 67 is provided downstream of the first flow path 701 having the curved path 701a, and a second ball entrance 640 is provided downstream of the second flow path 702 (lower end of the fifth flow path 704b). is doing. With this configuration, the balls flowing into the second flow path 702 can flow down toward the second ball inlet 640 at intervals of 1.2 seconds without lowering the flow velocity. Therefore, since the interval between the balls flowing down the second flow path 702 can be made constant, the balls are connected in the second flow path 702 and a plurality of balls enter the second ball entrance 640 at the same time. can be suppressed. In addition, when the third symbol display device 81 notifies that the electric accessory 640a has been opened without noticing that the electric accessory 640a has been opened, the ball can be moved to the second ball entrance 640 as soon as possible. You can enter the ball.

In addition, different flow paths (first flow path 701, first flow path 701, 2nd flow path 702), when the distribution member 700 is destroyed so that the balls flow down only to one of the flow paths (when the distribution function is disabled), the second ball entrance It is possible to make it difficult to enter the ball into 640 . In other words, when the through gate 67 and the electric accessory 640a are arranged in one of the flow paths distributed by the distribution member 700, the distribution member 700 is destroyed, creating a state in which the balls flow down only in one flow path. By doing so, it becomes possible to create a state in which it is easy for a ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. It is possible to suppress the creation of a situation in which it is easy to

A case where the sphere flows down the second flow path 702 will be described. The second flow path 702 is configured so that the ball flows down in a shorter period than the first flow path 701 described above. Specifically, it is configured such that it takes about 1.5 seconds for the ball that has flowed into the second flow path 702 to flow out from the flow outlet 704c. With this configuration, when 100 balls are shot toward the right area per minute, the balls that flow into the first flow path 701 and the balls that are shot next to the balls flow into the second flow path 702. and the ball that has flowed into the bottom right area of the game board 13 (area where the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 are arranged) almost simultaneously (about 0.1 second difference) Become. Therefore, in the game state (big win state or small win state) in which each variable winning device is opened, it is possible to make it easier to win a plurality of balls at once.

A part of the second flow path 702 (fifth flow path 704b) is provided on the back side of the first flow path 701, so that a plurality of flow paths overlap when viewed from the front. In this way, by forming a plurality of ball passages using the depth direction of the game board 13, it is possible to reduce the space for forming the ball passages (the area occupied by the ball passages on the game board 13). can.

Furthermore, the ball outlet (outflow port 704c) of the second flow path 702 is located below the outlet of the first flow path 701 (downstream side of the second ball inlet 640), and is positioned to the right of the game board 13. The lower area is configured such that the spheres flow downstream from the spheres flowing out from the first channel 701 . As a result, the ball flowing out from the outflow port 704c vigorously (the ball flowing out at a higher speed than the ball flowing down the first flow path 701) collides directly with the ball flowing out from the first flow path 701, resulting in irregular It is possible to suppress the situation in which ball flow occurs.

In addition, in this embodiment, a configuration is used in which the balls fired by the right-handed game are alternately distributed to two flow paths by the rotating distribution member 700, but other configurations may be used. Instead of alternately (1:1) for one channel, the balls may be distributed at different ratios, or the balls may be distributed for three or more channels. Further, in this embodiment, the distribution member 700 is used in which the distribution destination of the next passing ball changes depending on the weight of the passed ball. Dividers may also be used.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 102 to 110, the electrical configuration of the third embodiment will be described. Only points different from the first embodiment will be illustrated and described, and illustrations and descriptions of the same configurations as those of the first embodiment will be omitted.

FIG. 102 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment. ROM202 in the third embodiment, ROM202 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 10), in that the migration destination selection table 202ba is added, the small hit random number table 202b to the small hit random number 3 table 202bb, The second per random number table 202c is changed to the second per random number 3 table 202bc, the normal figure fluctuation pattern table 202f is changed to the normal figure fluctuation pattern 3 table 202bf, and the small hit type selection table 202g is changed to the small hit type selection 3 table 202bg. It is different from the first embodiment in that Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to Drawing 103 (a), small hit random number 3 table 202bb is explained. In the third embodiment, as described above, when the game state is the latent game state, it is configured to win a small hit even in the lottery for the first special symbol. Specifically, if the value of the acquired first winning random number counter is in the range of "112 to 342", it is configured to be a small winning.

Next, the second winning random number 3 table 202bc will be described with reference to FIG. 103(b). In the third embodiment, compared to the first embodiment, even when the probability of normal symbols is low (normal state, latent probability state), it is configured so that the winning is almost normal symbols. Specifically, if the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is "0 to 230", it is configured to win the normal symbol.

Next, with reference to Drawing 104 (a), small hit classification selection 3 table 202bg is explained. In the third embodiment, as described above, when the game state is the latent game state, it is configured to win a small hit even in the lottery for the first special symbol. Then, if the value of the small hit type counter is in the range of "0 to 49", "small hit A" is set as the small hit type, and if it is in the range of "50 to 99", "small hit B" is set. be done.

When a small win is won, the variation of the other special symbol is temporarily stopped or forcibly stopped in accordance with the kind of the small win in the same way as when a small win is won with the second special symbol. It is configured as follows. Specifically, when the "small win A" is won, the second special symbol that is fluctuating is temporarily stopped, and when the "small win B" is won, the second special symbol is not changed. It is configured to forcibly stop.

Next, with reference to FIG.104(b), normal figure fluctuation pattern 3 table 202bf is demonstrated. The third embodiment is different from the above-described first embodiment in that the variable time is shortened even when the probability of normal symbols is low. Specifically, when the probability of normal symbols is low, the variable time is configured to be 500 milliseconds (0.5 seconds). By configuring in this way, it becomes easier to fluctuate, and the lottery opportunities for normal symbols increase. In addition, as described above, in the third embodiment, it is configured so that it is easy to win the normal design even when the probability of the normal design is low. This makes it easier for the ball to enter the right first ball entrance 64b2 even in the latent state.

Next, the migration destination selection table 202ba will be described with reference to FIGS. 105 to 108. FIG. The transition destination selection table 202ba is the type of variation pattern selection table for selecting the variation pattern determined after the small winning game when the small winning is won in the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the number of times of transition. It is a lottery table for determining the number of times (the number of executions of the determination game (lottery of special symbols) for selecting a variation pattern from the shifted variation pattern selection table).

FIG. 105 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the migration destination selection table 202ba. A migration 1 table 202ba1 (see FIG. 107) and a migration 2 table 202ba2 (see FIG. 108) are set in the migration destination table 202ba. 202ba2 is set.

FIG. 106 is a diagram showing in detail the contents of the migration destination selection table 202ba. The game state is divided into cases where it is a potential state (non-electric support game state in a high probability game state) and cases where it is a game state other than a potential game state (other), and the current game state is a game state other than the potential game state, the transition destination table is not set, and the variation pattern is set from the variation pattern selection table 202e (see FIG. 15) currently set. ing.

On the other hand, in the case of the hidden game state, the transfer destination table based on the acquired value of the transfer counter 203ba, and the number of fluctuations of special symbols (predetermined number after transfer) for selecting the fluctuation pattern from the transfer destination table. are set respectively. Specifically, when the obtained value of the transition counter 203ba is "0 to 90", the transition 1 table 202ba1 is set (selected), and 10 times is set (selected) as the specified number after transition. . Further, when the obtained value of the transition counter 203ba is "91 to 98", the transition 1 table ba1 is set, and 3 times is set as the specified number after transition. Further, when the obtained value of the transition counter 203ba is "99", the transition 2 table 202ba2 is set, and 100 times is set as the post-migration prescribed number.

In this way, only in the latent sure game state, when a small win is won, the transition 1 table 202ba1 or the transition 2 table 202ba2 is set as the variation pattern selection table 202e used after the small win game. there is By configuring in this way, the left-handed game (a game method in which the player shoots the game ball at the shooting intensity at which the game ball flows down the left channel of the third symbol display device 81 and plays the game) is not performed. Only in a latent game state, which is a game state in which a game is played, when a small win game is played, the variation pattern can be determined using a specific variation pattern selection table for a specified number of times.

Here, in the normal game state (game state without low-probability electrical support) and the probability variable game state (game state with high-probability electrical support), 10 minutes is selected as the variation time of the second special symbol. In addition, since the winning rate to the right first ball entrance 64b2 is also lower than that in the case of left-handed hitting, the player hits left to play the game through the left first ball-entering hole 64b1. It is constructed such that playing a game by hitting a ball is more advantageous for the player. In this embodiment, although illustration is omitted, the setting of the determination value of the second per random number table 202c is changed, and the determination value of the random number table per normal symbol for low probability time is "0 to 230". is set, and "0 to 231" is set as the random number table per normal symbol for the high probability, and the difference between the low probability and the high probability is narrowed. In addition, the setting value of the general pattern fluctuation pattern table 202f is also changed, and the general pattern low probability and the general pattern high probability are both set to 500 ms. By configuring in this way, even if it is a game state with electric sapo (high probability game state of general figure), even if it is a non-electric sapo game state (low probability game state of general figure), electric power The accessory is set to be easily opened, and the game ball is configured to enter the second ball entrance 640 more easily than the left first ball entrance 64b1.

However, since the variation time of the second special symbol is remarkably long between the normal game state and the probability variable game state, the right-handed game ball can be configured to be disadvantageous to the player. , the game can be played by a left-handed game. In addition, in the hidden game state, the variation time of the second special symbol is set to be short, so that it is more advantageous for the player to play the game by hitting to the right (see FIG. 17(b)). ). On the other hand, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to 10 minutes as shown in FIG.

In the third embodiment, when the potential game state is reached, a right-handed game is possible (possible by setting a short fluctuation time), and a lottery with the second special symbol is performed, making it easier to win a small hit. In the small winning game, since the 2R second variable winning device 650 is opened, the game ball can be made to win the second variable winning device 650, and the prize balls corresponding to the winning are paid out to the player. It is possible to increase the number of balls possessed by the player. Therefore, the longer the period of the potential game state is set, the more chances of winning a small win (the number of times of winning) can be increased.

Here, when the jackpot A in the first special symbol is won, the game state after the jackpot is set to the probability variable game state (high probability, game state with electric sapo), so it is set to the left-handed game state. It is configured to set a game state (a game state in which a small winning game is difficult to be executed) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the potential game state.

However, in the third embodiment, in the case of the small hit B, the lottery result is forcibly removed from the variation of the first special symbol during fluctuation, and the special symbol indicating the small win is forcibly stopped. configured to stop. Therefore, when the variation display of the first special symbol based on (corresponding to) the lottery result of the big hit A is executed, the second special symbol is displayed before the variation time (variation period) elapses. By stopping the variation of the lottery result of winning B, the lottery result of the variation of the big winning A in the changing first special symbol can be forcibly removed and stopped and displayed, and the latent sure game state is removed. It is possible to prevent the transition to the variable probability game state and lengthen the period of the latent probability game state.

Therefore, in the latent sure game state, the fluctuation time for the small win (only the small win B) in the second special symbol is shorter than the fluctuation time for the big win (only the big win A) in the first special symbol. By facilitating the selection of , a game state advantageous to the player can be obtained.

Therefore, although the details will be described later, when the transition 2 table 202ba2 (see FIG. 108) is determined, the variation time in which the success/failure determination result is a big hit in the first special symbol is a variation of 60 seconds with a probability of 99% of the selection rate. The time is determined, and the variation time in which the success/failure determination result is a small hit in the second special symbol is determined with a probability of 95% of the selection rate of 1s. In addition, in the second special symbol, when the result of the judgment is out, the fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is determined with a selection probability of 100%. Therefore, after the start of the variation that becomes a big hit in the first special symbol, 120 times of deviation variations are possible, and the probability of a small hit in the second special symbol is set at 231/459 (see FIG. 103 (a)). Therefore, the small winning B is won with a high probability (the probability that the small winning B is selected is 1/2 in the small winning winning), the second special symbol is stopped, and the big winning A is won. It is possible to forcibly stop the fluctuation of the first special symbol. 106, the transition 2 table 202ba2 is set to 100 times as shown in FIG. It is fixed and set (on condition that the hidden game state is set (when the latent game state is shifted to another game state, the variation pattern selection table corresponding to the game state of the transition destination (No. 1) is set)). In addition, even if you win a small prize during the period (within the specified number of times) in which the transition 1 table 202ba1 or the transition 2 table 202ba2 is set, the destination table will not be changed, and the same The destination table is maintained and set.

In this way, by setting the transition 2 table 202ba2, the setting period of the latent game state is lengthened, during which a small win can be won, and the number of small wins won is increased and awarded to the player. The number of prize balls can be increased.

In addition, in the present embodiment, although it is configured to allow a small hit with both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, it is not limited to this, and a small prize can be obtained with only the second special symbol as in the first embodiment. It may be configured to hit. In addition, only the small hit B is configured to forcibly stop the fluctuation of the first special symbol due to the result of the lottery that is out. When a small hit is achieved, the second special symbol) may be forced to come off and stop.

Next, the migration 1 table 202ba1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 107 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the migration 1 table 202ba1. The transition 1 table 202ba1 stores transition information by determining the transition 1 table 202ba1 as the transition destination table when a small hit is won by the transition destination selection table 202ba (see FIG. 106) (finishing timing of the small winning game). This table is set in an area 203bc.

In the transition 1 table 202ba1, when the lottery result of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is a big hit, the variation time of 0.5 s is determined with a selection probability of 95%, and the variation time is 60 s with a selection probability of 5%. is configured to determine the fluctuation time of Further, when the result of the lottery is a small prize, the fluctuation time of 1s is determined with a selection probability of 100%. Further, when the lottery result is a loss, the variable time of 1 s is determined with a selection probability of 100%.

On the other hand, if the lottery result of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is a big hit, the variation time of 0.5 s is determined with a selection probability of 95%, and the variation time of 600 s is determined with a selection probability of 5%. configured to be Further, when the lottery result is a small prize, the variable time of 1 s is determined with a selection probability of 90%, and the variable time of 0.5 s is determined with a selection probability of 10%. It is configured. If the result of the lottery is a loss, the variation time of 1 s is determined with a 100% probability of selection.

Thus, in the transition 1 table 202ba1, when the first special symbol becomes a big win, a short variation time of 0.5 seconds is determined with a high selection probability, and when the second special symbol becomes a small win, Since the variation time of 1s or 0.5s is selected, it is difficult to forcibly stop the first special symbol after the first special symbol starts to vary. Therefore, in the transition 1 table 202ba1, when the jackpot A is won in the first special symbol, it is difficult to forcibly stop the fluctuation, so the transition destination table ( It is configured as a fluctuation pattern selection table). Therefore, by the transition destination selection table 202ba, the number of times (10 times in the present embodiment) that is the specified number of times after transition of the transition 1 table 202ba1 is set to be disadvantageous to the player. In addition, the transition 1 table 202ba1 is set in the transition destination selection table 202ba with a probability of being selected at 99/100, and in the latent certainty gaming state, the latent certainty gaming state is set long, and the gambling nature becomes too high. It is designed to prevent defects.

Next, the migration 2 table 202ba2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 108 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of this transition 2 table 202ba2. The migration 2 table 202ba2 is set in the migration information storage area 203bc when the migration 2 table 202ba2 is determined by the migration destination selection table 202ba.

In the transition 2 table 202ba2, when the success/failure determination result of the first special symbol is a jackpot, a variation time of 0.5 seconds is determined with a selection probability of 1%, and a variation time of 60 seconds is determined with a selection probability of 99%. configured to be In addition, when the result of the win/loss determination is a small hit, the variation time of 1 s is determined with a selection probability of 100%. Further, when the result of the judgment is a failure, the variation time of 1 s is determined with a selection probability of 100%.

On the other hand, if the result of the second special symbol hit/fail judgment is a big hit, the variation time is determined to be 0.5 seconds with a selection probability of 1%, and the variation time of 600 seconds is determined with a selection probability of 99%. configured to be determined. In addition, when the result of the winning/failure determination is a small win, the variable time of 1 s is determined with a selection probability of 95%, and the variable time of 30 s is determined with a selection probability of 5%. Further, when the result of the judgment is a failure, the variable time of 0.5 s is determined with a selection probability of 100%.

Thus, in the transition 2 table 202ba2, the variation time selected when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit is determined with a high probability and a long variation time (60s), and the lottery result of the second special symbol is determined. The variation time selected when is a small win is configured to select a short variation time (1 s) with high probability. Therefore, even if the variation of the small hit B is started in the second special symbol after the variation to become a big hit in the first special symbol is started, the second special symbol is stopped before the variation in the first special symbol is stopped. The variation of the 2 special symbols can be easily stopped, and the 1st special symbol during variation can be forcibly stopped as a result of determination of being out. Therefore, it is possible to easily block the execution of the big win A, lengthen the set period while maintaining the latent probability variation, increase the number of times the small win game is executed, and increase the number of prize balls for the player.

Further, in the transition 2 table 202ba2, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is lost, the variation time is set as short as 0.5 s, so the variation time (60 s) for the first special symbol jackpot. 120 times of fluctuation can be made until the fluctuation is stopped even after is executed, and since the lottery probability of the small winning is 231/459, the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped a plurality of times with a high probability. It is possible to win a small hit until. Since the selection ratio of the small win B is 1/2 among those winning the small win, the fluctuation of the small win B can be easily stopped before the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped, and the execution of the big win A is prevented. configured to be easy.

Next, the special table will be described with reference to FIG. In the special table, a transition 1 table 202ba1 or a transition 2 table ba2 is set, and when a specified number of times has passed, a variation pattern for selecting a variation pattern in the latent sure game state in the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is a kind of selection table.

FIG. 109 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special table. When the transition 1 table 202ba1 or the transition 2 table 202ba2 is set and the specified number of times has passed, this special table is stored in the transition information storage area 203bc at the timing when the next variation pattern is selected after the specified number of fluctuations is completed. set.

The special table is such that when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a jackpot, a variation time of 0.5s is determined with a selection probability of 20%, and a variation time of 60s is determined with a selection probability of 80%. is configured to In addition, when the result of the win/loss determination is a small hit, the variation time of 1 s is determined with a selection probability of 100%. Further, when the result of the judgment is a failure, the variation time of 1 s is determined with a selection probability of 100%.

On the other hand, if the result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the variation time of 0.5 s is determined with a selection probability of 20%, and the variation time of 600 s is determined with a selection probability of 80%. It is configured. In addition, when the result of judging whether or not the second special symbol is a small hit, the variation time of 1 s is determined with a selection probability of 50%, and the variation time of 30 s is determined with a selection probability of 50%. It is In addition, when the result of judging whether or not the second special symbol is correct, it is configured such that the fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is determined with a selection probability of 100%.

Thus, in the special table, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit, the selection probability of determining the variation time of 60s (seconds) is set higher than in the transition 1 table 202ba1, while the second The selection ratio of determining the variation time of 1s as the variation time of the small hit in the special symbol is set low. Further, the fluctuation time at the time of deviation in the second special symbol is set at 0.5 s, which is set shorter than the transition 1 table 202ba1. That is, in the special table, the fluctuation of 60 seconds that becomes the big win A in the first special symbol is stopped by stopping the fluctuation that becomes the small win B in the second special symbol than the transition 1 table 202ba2. It is composed of tables that are advantageous to the player, and setting a special table corresponds to setting a game state that is advantageous to the player.

On the other hand, in the special table, a long variation time of 30s is determined with a selection probability of 1/2 for the variation time of the small hit, so that the variation (variation time 60s) that becomes the big hit A in the first special symbol is started. It is configured to be able to execute a small winning variation of at most one time from . As a result, the special table is configured not to be more advantageous than the transition 2 table 202ba2.

In this way, when the transition 1 table 202ba1 is set and a specified number of times has passed, a special table is set that provides an advantageous game state until the next small win and the transition destination table is determined by lottery. is configured to As a result, it is configured to suppress the end of the latent sure game state due to the execution of the jackpot A during the period from the passage of the specified number of times to the next transition to the destination table. Furthermore, the transition 2 table 202ba2 is set to provide the most advantageous game state for the player, and even after the prescribed number of times has passed, a special table is set that is more advantageous to the player than the transition 1 table 202ba1. , the player's desire to play can be maintained, and the player can be interested in the type of the destination table to be set next.

Normally, in a gaming machine, the player's interest in the prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game is the highest, but according to this embodiment, in the normal game state or the variable probability game state, the player is interested in the jackpot game. A game can be played, and in the latent sure game state, the game can be played with the expectation that the jackpot game in the first special pattern will not be executed, and different expectations can be given depending on the game state, thereby diversifying the game. can be

Next, with reference to FIG. 110, RAM 203 of main controller 110 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 110 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the third embodiment. The RAM 203 in the third embodiment differs from the RAM 203 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 19) in that a transition counter 203ba, a post-transition variation counter 203bb, and a transition information storage area 203bc are added. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, description thereof will be omitted.

The migration counter 203ba is a counter for determining the migration destination table and the prescribed number of times after migration (prescribed number of times) from the migration destination selection table 202ba. The transition counter 203ba is a counter value that is repeatedly updated in the range of "0 to 99", and is a counter value that is updated in the process of S2411 in the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110. be. When the power is turned on, the value backed up when the power is turned off is updated, the RAM is cleared, and when the backup area is initialized, the update starts from the initial value "0". This transition counter 203ba is configured to be acquired based on winning a small hit in the processing of S1172 in the special figure 2 deviation variation processing 3 (see S1071 in FIG. 112) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 ing. In addition, regarding the special figure 1 deviation variation processing 3, the processing of the second special symbol in the processing of the special figure 2 deviation variation processing 3 (see FIG. 112: S1071) is the first special symbol, and the processing of the first special symbol is the first. 2 special symbols, respectively, so illustration and description thereof are omitted.

The post-transfer variation number counter 203bb is a counter for counting the number of variations of the special symbol executed after the transfer destination table is set (the total number of variations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol). . Post-transfer fluctuation counter 203bb is the initial value when the transfer destination table is set in the process of S1175 in the special figure 2 deviation fluctuation process 3 (see S1071 in FIG. 112) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 Some "0" is set. In addition, in the processing of S1176 and S1199 in special figure 2 deviation fluctuation processing 3 (see FIG. 112: S1071), after being added by 1, the value of the processing of S1177 is the specified number of times determined by the destination selection table 202ba It is determined whether there is, and if it is the specified number of times, a process of setting the special table in the migration information storage area 203bc is performed.

It should be noted that also in the special figure 1 deviation variation processing 3 (not shown), similarly to the special figure 2 deviation variation processing 3, the processing for the post-transition variation number counter 203bb is executed.

The migration information storage area 203bc is a storage area in which a migration destination table determined from the migration destination selection table 202ba and a special table that is set when a specified number of times of the set migration destination table has passed are set. When the information of the transfer destination table is stored in this area, it is controlled so that the variation pattern is determined from the transfer destination table of the type stored as the special symbol variation pattern selection table.

<Regarding control processing of main controller 110 in the third embodiment>
Next, control processing executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 111 and 112. FIG. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 31: S306) is the first special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (not shown) for the control process executed by the main controller 110 in the first embodiment. To, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (Figure 37: S908) is the second special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (Figure 111: S972), the special figure 2 deviation fluctuation process (Figure 38: S1009) is the special figure 2 deviation fluctuation The difference is that it is changed to process 3 (FIG. 112: S1071). In the first special symbol jackpot determination process 3, the process for the first special symbol in the second special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (FIG. 111: S972) is the second special symbol, and the process for the second special symbol is the first special symbol. The only difference is that the pattern is changed, so detailed illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 111, the second special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (FIG. 111: S972) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment will be described. In the second special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (FIG. 111: S972), first, data of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is obtained (S1001). It is determined whether the variable probability flag 203g is on (S1002). It is determined whether the variable probability flag 203g is ON, that is, whether it is the variable probability game state or the latent probability variable game state. When it is determined that the variable probability flag 203 is ON, the lottery result is acquired based on the first winning random number table 202a for high probability (S1003). After that, the process of S1005 is executed.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1002, when it is determined that the variable probability flag 203g is off (S1002: No), the lottery result is acquired based on the first per random number table 202a for low probability (S1004). In the process of S1005, it is determined whether or not the lottery result obtained in the processes of S1003 and S1004 is a big win (S1005). When it is determined that it is a big hit (S1005: Yes), the big hit flag 203n corresponding to the special figure 2 is set to ON (S1006). The lottery result for the second special symbol is set to a big hit (S1007).

Based on the value of the acquired first winning type counter C2, the big winning design of the second special design to be displayed on the first design display device 37 is set (S1008). The value of the post-transition variation number counter 203bb is reset to "0" (S1071). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1005, when it is determined that the lottery result is out (S1005: No), special figure 2 loss variation processing is executed (S1009). After performing special figure 2 deviation fluctuation processing (S1009), this processing is ended. In addition, the special figure 2 loss variation processing (S1009) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 112, the second special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (FIG. 111: S972) in the third embodiment, which is one process of the special figure 2 deviation variation process 3 (FIG. 112: S1071) Processing will be explained. In special figure 2 deviation fluctuation processing 3 (Fig. 112: S1071), first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result is a small hit (S1101). When it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (S1101: Yes), the small hit flag 203p is set to ON (S1102). The lottery result of the second special symbol is set to a small hit (S1103). A symbol corresponding to the small winning symbol is set for the second special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 (S1104). It is determined whether either the migration destination table (migration 1 table or migration 2 table) or the special table is set (S1171). If it is determined that the transfer destination table or the special table is set (S1171: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the post-transfer variation number counter 203bb (S1199), and then this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1171 that either the migration destination table (the migration 1 table or the migration 2 table) or the special table is not set (S1171: No), the value of the migration counter 203ba is acquired. (S1172). Next, a migration destination table is set based on the acquired value of the migration counter 203ba (S1173). Then, a command indicating the set destination table is set (S1174), the value of the post-migration fluctuation number counter 203bb is set to 0 (S1175), and this process is terminated.

Also, in the process of S1101, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small hit (S1101: No), 1 is added to the value of the post-transition variation number counter 203bb (S1176). Then, in the process of S1176, it is determined whether or not the added value of the post-transition fluctuation number counter 203bb is a specified number (S1177). When the value of the post-transition variation number counter 203bb is the specified number (S1177: Yes), a special table is set (S1178), a transition command is set (S1179), and the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. 2 out of special symbols are set (S1105), and this process is terminated.

In the process of S1177, when it is determined that the value of the post-shift variation counter 203bb is not the specified number (S1177: No), the above-described processes of S1178 to S1179 are skipped and displayed on the first symbol display device 37. A second special symbol is set (S1105), and the process is terminated.

<Modified example of the third embodiment>
Next, a modification of the above-described third embodiment will be described. The high probability game state in the latent probability variable and probability variable game state is shifted to the low probability state when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (total of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times). It may be configured to By constructing in this way, even when the transition destination table for forcibly stopping the execution of the jackpot A is forcibly missed, the game state can be varied, and the gambling property is remarkably enhanced. Defects can be suppressed.

In addition, as a further modified example 2 of the third embodiment, in the latent probability variable gaming state, the transition destination table to be selected is set to be variable depending on the number of times the special symbol changes. 1 special design, the total value of the number of times of fluctuation of the second special design) If it fluctuates, the big hit fluctuation of the first special design is lengthened (for example, 300 s), and the small hit fluctuation of the second special design is shortened (for example, , 0.5 s). By shortening the variation time of the deviation variation of the second special symbol to 0.5 s, it may be configured to set a transition destination table that is more advantageous to the player. By constructing in this way, it is possible to increase the willingness to forcibly stop the big win A by the small win of the second special symbol in the latent probability variation, and to enhance the interest of the game.

As described above, in the first embodiment to the third embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 capable of simultaneously executing the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol has been described. Winning a prize that triggers each lottery without executing the other pachinko machine 10, i.e., the lottery (fluctuation) of the first special pattern and the lottery (fluctuation) of the second special pattern at the same time. Priority is given to the pachinko machine 10 of the type that executes the lottery in the order of information acquisition (the order of the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 and the ball entering the second ball entrance 640) and the lottery of one special pattern. It may be configured so as to be used for the pachinko machine 10 of the type that is executed on a regular basis.

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the variation of the first special symbol and the variation of the second special symbol are executed at the same time. However, it is not limited to this, and may be configured to be executed when the big hit variation is started. Furthermore, even when a small win is won by the variation of the other special symbol, the variation of the other special symbol is discarded or interrupted according to the type of the small winning, but the variation of the small winning starts. You can set the time.

In each of the above-described embodiments, as an example of various effects to be executed, the display effects displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 have been described. It is sufficient if there is, display effects displayed on a display device other than the third symbol display device 81, voice effects notified to the player by sound, and various light emitting means (LED) attached to the pachinko machine 10. You may use the light emission production which notifies to.

In addition, as the various effects executed in each of the above-described embodiments, a notification effect that allows the player to grasp the contents with certainty and a suggestive effect that the player indirectly informs the player of the contents are used. A suggestive effect may be executed instead, or a notification effect may be executed instead of the suggestive effect.

Furthermore, in each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with two types of high and low odds of winning a jackpot (jackpot probability) in a special symbol lottery (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of special symbols). However, without being limited to this, for example, setting means (for example, a setting switch) capable of setting one setting value from among a plurality of types of setting values is provided, and each setting value set by the setting means It may be configured such that main controller 110 executes control in which different jackpot probabilities are set.

In this case, for example, six levels of setting values from 1 to 6 are prepared, and when the setting value "1" is set, the probability of the big win is the highest, and the setting value "6" is set. It is preferable to set the jackpot probability for each set value in order so that the jackpot probability becomes the lowest.

In addition, as the jackpot probability set for each setting value, only the jackpot probability corresponding to the low probability state of special symbols may be configured to be different according to the set value, or the high probability of special symbols. Only the jackpot probability corresponding to the state may be configured to vary according to the set value.

In addition, depending on the set value described above, not only the jackpot probability but also, for example, the selection ratio of each jackpot type is changed, the probability of winning a small hit is changed, the selection ratio of the variation pattern of the special symbol, The variable time may be varied. In this case, for example, a variation pattern and a jackpot type that are likely to be selected only when a specific set value is set are provided, and whether or not a special symbol variation based on the variation pattern and a jackpot game based on the jackpot type have been executed. The currently set setting value may be determined by the player's attention.

Further, a setting command for indicating the set value is set, and based on the setting command received by the audio lamp control device 113 side, a setting suggestion effect is executed to suggest the currently set value. Alternatively, a command indicating the jackpot type output from the main controller 110 (command for indicating the lottery result) or a command for indicating the variation pattern of the special symbol (command for indicating the variation time) It may be configured such that, when received, the currently set setting value is determined from the contents of the received command, and the setting suggestion effect is executed based on the determination result. With this configuration, the number of commands output from main controller 110 can be reduced.

Further, as in each of the above-described embodiments, in the pachinko machine 10 capable of simultaneously executing the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol, the above-described set value can be set. When using such a configuration, depending on the set value, various parameters may be defined for each set value so that the ease of variation (lottery) of each special symbol is variable. With the setting value of , the specific game state in which the lottery of one special symbol is advantageous to the player is a predetermined set value different from the specific set value, the lottery of the other special symbol different from the one special symbol Various parameters may be defined for each set value so as to be advantageous to the player. In this case, the fact that the special symbol lottery is advantageous to the player means that the special symbol lottery is easier to execute, or the privilege given when the special symbol lottery result is a specific lottery result (jackpot game content) , content of the small winning game, game state set after the end of the big winning game) are advantageous to the player.

It should be noted that the game state transition destination and the transition distribution rate after the jackpot in each game state are not limited to these, and may be appropriately set. For example, only the time saving state 2 may be used as the time saving state to be shifted from the normal game state. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the willingness to play of a player who has not been able to shift to the variable probability state even though he has won a jackpot in the normal game state.

Also, regardless of the game state, the game state transition destination and distribution rate are unified according to the type of special figure, but not limited to this, the game state transition destination and transition distribution rate according to the game state may be changed. As a result, it is possible to provide a more complicated game, and there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.

In each of the above embodiments, each time the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d in the main controller 110 is updated (that is, each time it increases or decreases), the reserved ball number command is issued. Although the case of transmitting from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d in the main controller 110 increases, the main controller 110 transmits the reserved number command to the sound lamp controller 113 . In addition, in the voice lamp control device 113, when receiving the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, it is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b by one. As a result, the number of times master controller 110 transmits a hold number command to audible lamp controller 113 and the number of times audible lamp controller 113 receives a hold number command can be reduced. The control load of the audio ramp control device 113 can be reduced.

In each of the above embodiments, winning into the first ball entrance 64 and passing through the through gate 67 are each suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of suspended balls is limited to four. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of pending balls in the variable display based on the winning to the first ball entrance 64 is displayed numerically in a part of the third pattern display device 81, or the area divided into four is displayed by the number of pending balls. It may be displayed in a different manner (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light-emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first pattern display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light-emitting member. can be configured to

Further, as shown in each of the above embodiments, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertically scrolling the pattern as identification information on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. The pattern may be moved and displayed in the vertical direction or along a predetermined path such as an L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern. It also includes the production display etc. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the third symbol display for showing the lottery result of each symbol to the player is performed by one display means (third symbol display device 81), but other configurations are used. For example, among the third symbols, different display means may be provided for displaying the main symbol to be displayed in an emphasized manner to the player and for displaying the sub-symbols. Also, as the configuration of the display means, a configuration other than the liquid crystal display may be used.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the frame buttons 22 and 23 are used as the operation means that can be operated by the player. may be used, such as a lever-shaped operation means that can determine whether the player is operated by tilting left or right or front and back, or a lever-shaped operation means that can be operated by the player touching or approaching. A touch sensor type operating means that can distinguish between them, or a wireless operating means that can distinguish that an operation has been made by transmitting a predetermined radio wave may be used. In addition, each of the movable valve 750, storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771), second frame button (release button) 22b (1022b, 1122b), and third frame button (release button) 22c A part or all of the operation control may be performed by the sound lamp control device 113 instead of the main control device 110 .

In each embodiment described above, the sound lamp control device 113 performs processing for setting the display mode in the effect executed using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the game (lottery) itself is the sound lamp Although it is configured to be executed by the main control device 110 different from the control device 113, the processing for executing the game (lottery) and the result of the game (lottery) are displayed as effects without being limited to this. It may be configured such that the processing for and the processing are executed by the same control device. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to execute a plurality of different processes with one control device.

The present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, after the big winning pattern is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine may be implemented.

Furthermore, in each of the above embodiments, two types of special symbols, the first special symbol and the second special symbol, are used as a plurality of special symbol types. may be used, or only one special symbol type may be used. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, a game property in which a lottery (fluctuation) is performed according to a rule in which a plurality of special symbols are determined in advance, and a game property in which a lottery (fluctuation) is performed independently of each other are explained. However, each of the game features described in each embodiment may be replaced or combined.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the control lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

The present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, after the big winning pattern is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. In addition, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine in which a plurality of combinations of probabilities (commonly referred to as settings) relating to the jackpot lottery are provided, and the settings can be changed on the gaming parlor side. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined may be implemented.

In addition, as a pachinko machine with multiple stages of settings, the combination of jackpot probability (a combination of the jackpot probability in the low probability state and the jackpot probability in the variable probability state) can be set in multiple stages (for example, 6 stages) can be set as a representative example, but is not limited to this. In place of or in addition to combinations of jackpot probabilities, for example, a pachinko machine capable of varying the ratio of each jackpot pattern (each jackpot type) determined in the event of a jackpot according to settings. may That is, depending on the setting, the rate at which a jackpot type advantageous to the player is determined may be varied, or the rate at which a jackpot type disadvantageous to the player is determined may be varied. More specifically, for example, the ratio of determining the jackpot with a large number of rounds (eg, 16 rounds) is varied according to the setting, or the jackpot with a small number of rounds (eg, 2 rounds) is determined. A configuration may be adopted in which the degree of advantage for each setting can be varied by varying the ratio of each setting according to the setting. In addition, for example, the ratio of determining the jackpot with a large number of times of time reduction (for example, 100 times) after the end of the jackpot is varied according to the setting, or the jackpot with a small number of times of time reduction (for example, 0 times) may be varied according to the setting. Furthermore, after the end of the jackpot, the rate at which the jackpot that transitions to (or easily transitions to) an advantageous game state (eg, variable probability state) is determined can be varied according to settings, or a disadvantageous game state (eg, normal state) ) (or easily shifted) may be changed according to the setting. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which provides a big-hit classification in which the ratio determined only by specific setting increases significantly (almost never determined by other settings). Specifically, for example, six settings from 1 to 6 can be set, and setting 6 is the most advantageous setting. In setting 6, a 6-round jackpot is determined at a rate of 2% when a jackpot is achieved, whereas in other settings, a 6-round jackpot is determined only at a rate of 0.01%. may be configured. By constructing in this way, when the jackpot ends in 6 rounds, the possibility that the setting is the most advantageous setting 6 is extremely high, so the player is made to play the game paying attention to the number of rounds of the jackpot. be able to. Alternatively or in addition, for example, in setting 6, the ratio of the jackpot type in which 66 times of time saving is given after the jackpot ends may be higher than other settings. By configuring in this way, it is possible to play a game while paying attention to the number of times the time saving state ends. Alternatively, or in addition to these, for example, a jackpot type in which the jackpot (or accessories inside the jackpot, etc.) operates in an operation pattern different from other jackpot types during execution of the jackpot game. It may be configured such that the jackpot type is easily determined by a specific setting (the rate of determination is increased). In addition, in the case of varying the combination of the probability of the big win according to the setting, in the low probability state, the setting is more advantageous to the player, the higher the probability of the big win, while in the variable probability state, the setting is disadvantageous to the player. It is good also as a structure which makes a jackpot probability high as it is. In particular, in the variable probability state, the more the number of special symbol lotteries increases, the easier it is to increase the number of possession balls (the number of prize balls paid out tends to be greater than the number of game balls fired). Effective in game machines. More specifically, for example, it is a configuration that continues until the next big hit is won in the variable probability state, and by applying it to a game machine of the type that becomes a small hit with a high probability in the variable probability state, the high setting advantage You can increase your sexuality. That is, if the probability of winning a big win in the variable probability state is low, the number of lottery times until the next big win tends to increase, so the chances of getting a small win and winning balls also increase. Therefore, when the probability variable state occurs, it becomes easier for the player to win more prize balls until the next big win, which is advantageous for the player.

All or part of each of the above-described embodiments may be combined.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown.

<Characteristic group A>
a first determination means capable of executing a first determination; and a first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying, on a display means, first identification information for indicating a first determination result by the first determination means. , first dynamic display period determination means capable of determining a first dynamic display period of the first identification information displayed by the first dynamic display means; and displaying the specific first determination result on the display means a first privilege granting means capable of granting a first privilege advantageous to the player when the first identification information is displayed in a display mode for indicating the a second dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information for indicating the second determination result by the second determination means on the display means; a second dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a second dynamic display period of the second identification information; a second privilege granting means capable of imparting a second privilege advantageous to the player when displayed, wherein the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. a first control for forcibly making the first determination result corresponding to the dynamically displayed first identification information other than the specific first determination result based on the established condition during the period and a second control for interrupting dynamic display of the dynamically displayed first identification information.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning opening is a win. Some of such gaming machines are set to either a normal game state or an advantageous game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state, triggered by the end of the winning state. In this conventional type gaming machine, by differentiating the type of the starting prize-winning port that the player mainly wins in the normal game state and the advantageous game state, the interest of the game is varied according to the change in the game state, thereby diversifying the game. (For example, Patent Document 1: JP-A-2006-000392). To solve the problem that a lottery game executed when a game ball enters a starting winning hole is only displayed in a variable pattern according to a predetermined variation pattern, the game becomes monotonous, and the player gets tired of the game early. there was a point

According to the game machine A1, the first control for forcibly produces a result other than the specific first determination result according to the condition that the dynamically displayed first identification information is established, and the second control for interrupting the dynamic display. are switched and executed by the switching means, the contents dynamically displayed by the first identification information can be changed from those at the start of the dynamic display depending on the established conditions, and various effects are provided to the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from quickly getting bored with the game.

In the gaming machine A1, the switching means sets the condition that the first type privilege in the second privilege is given while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. The first condition is that the first control can be executed, and the second type privilege in the second privilege is given during the period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. A gaming machine A2, characterized in that the second control can be executed with a second condition among the conditions that the second control is executed.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, it is possible to switch the control in the dynamic display of the first identification information that is dynamically displayed by the given privilege. There is an effect that the privilege can be easily recognized.

In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the switching means executes dynamic display of the first identification information based on determination as the specific first determination result as at least one condition for establishing the first condition. A gaming machine A3, characterized in that it is conditioned that

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1 or A2, dynamic display of the first identification information based on the determination as the specific first determination result is the fulfillment condition of the first condition. Since it is set to at least one of, it is effective in suppressing that the 1st privilege is given and being able to restrict the privilege to be given.

The gaming machine A4 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the first privilege is composed of a privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the second privilege.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the first privilege is set more advantageous than the second privilege, so the provision of the first privilege is forcibly stopped. By suppressing by doing so, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the gambling property increases in a short period of time, and to make it easier to grant the second privilege.

Any one of the game machines A1 to A4 has a game state setting means capable of setting a first game state and a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state, wherein the game state setting is performed. The means is capable of setting the first game state on the basis that the first privilege is given in a state in which the second game state is set. Machine A5.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the provision of the first privilege is regulated by the execution of the first control, so the first gaming state is established instead of the first privilege being provided. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the player's interest is remarkably reduced due to the transition from the second game state to .

The game machine A6 is characterized by having a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect for facilitating the establishment of the first condition when a predetermined condition is established in any one of the game machines A1 to A5.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, a suggestive effect that facilitates establishment of the first condition is executed. There is an effect that it can make the player expect and improve the amusement of the game.

<Feature B group> (variable difficulty of discarding big hit fluctuation due to small hit)
a first determination means capable of executing a first determination; and a first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying, on a display means, first identification information for indicating a first determination result by the first determination means. , first dynamic display period determination means capable of determining a first dynamic display period of the first identification information displayed by the first dynamic display means; and displaying the specific first determination result on the display means a first privilege granting means capable of granting a first privilege advantageous to the player when the first identification information is displayed in a display mode for indicating the a second dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information for indicating the second determination result by the second determination means on the display means; a second dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a second dynamic display period of the second identification information; a second privilege granting means capable of imparting a second privilege advantageous to the player when displayed, wherein the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. During the period, the first determination result corresponding to the dynamically displayed first identification information is forcibly changed to other than the specific first determination result based on the establishment of the first condition. A gaming machine B1 comprising first control means capable of executing No. 1 control and frequency varying means capable of varying the frequency of establishment of the first condition.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning opening is a win. Some of such gaming machines are set to either a normal game state or an advantageous game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state, triggered by the end of the winning state. In this conventional type gaming machine, by differentiating the type of the starting prize-winning port that the player mainly wins in the normal game state and the advantageous game state, the interest of the game is varied according to the change in the game state, thereby diversifying the game. (For example, Patent Document 1: JP-A-2006-000392). To solve the problem that a lottery game executed when a game ball enters a starting winning hole is only displayed in a variable pattern according to a predetermined variation pattern, the game becomes monotonous, and the player gets tired of the game early. there was a point

According to the gaming machine B1, since the frequency varying means can vary the frequency at which the first control is executed, the frequency at which the first privilege is given can be varied, and the game becomes monotonous. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that a person gets bored early.

In the gaming machine B1, the first condition can be established based on the second privilege being given when the first identification information corresponding to the specific first determination result is dynamically displayed. wherein the frequency varying means varies the establishment frequency by varying the second dynamic display period determined by the second dynamic display period determining means. Game machine B2.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, the establishment frequency can be varied by varying the second dynamic display period corresponding to the determined specific second determination result. There is an effect that the frequency can be varied by simple control.

In the game machine B1 or B2, as the second dynamic display period determined by the second dynamic display period determining means, a short dynamic display period group is set so that a short dynamic display period is easily selected; and at least a long dynamic display period group in which the dynamic display period is set to be easily selected, and the frequency varying means selects either the short dynamic display period group or the long dynamic display period group. A gaming machine B3 characterized in that the establishment frequency can be varied by setting one of them.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1 or B2, the activation frequency can be varied by switching the dynamic display period group. There is an effect that the establishment frequency can be switched variously.

<Feature C group> (variable advantageous period with small winning)
a first determination means capable of executing a first determination; and a first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying, on a display means, first identification information for indicating a first determination result by the first determination means. , first dynamic display period determination means capable of determining a first dynamic display period of the first identification information displayed by the first dynamic display means; and displaying the specific first determination result on the display means a first privilege granting means capable of granting a first privilege advantageous to the player when the first identification information is displayed in a display mode for indicating the a second dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information for indicating the second determination result by the second determination means on the display means; a second dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a second dynamic display period of the second identification information; A second privilege granting means capable of imparting a second privilege that is advantageous to the player when displayed, a first game state, and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. in a gaming machine having a game state setting means capable of setting the first It can be set by switching from the first game state to the second game state, and the game machine becomes disadvantageous to the player from the second game state when the first privilege is given. During the period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means, the dynamically displayed first identification information is displayed based on the establishment of the first condition. A gaming machine C1 comprising first control means capable of executing a first control forcibly making the first determination result corresponding to the identification information other than the specific first determination result.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning opening is a win. Some of such gaming machines are set to either a normal game state or an advantageous game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state, triggered by the end of the winning state. In this conventional type gaming machine, by differentiating the type of the starting prize-winning port that the player mainly wins in the normal game state and the advantageous game state, the interest of the game is varied according to the change in the game state, thereby diversifying the game. (For example, Patent Document 1: JP-A-2006-000392). To solve the problem that a lottery game executed when a game ball enters a starting winning hole is only displayed in a variable pattern according to a predetermined variation pattern, the game becomes monotonous, and the player gets tired of the game early. there was a point

According to the gaming machine C1, by executing the first control, it is possible to avoid switching to a game state that is disadvantageous to the player. This has the effect of suppressing the problem that the player gets bored with the game early.

In the gaming machine C1, the first condition is satisfied under the condition that the second privilege is granted when the first identification information corresponding to the specific first determination result is dynamically displayed. A gaming machine C2 characterized in that it is configured to be able to

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1, the second privilege is granted, thereby avoiding the provision of the first privilege and the setting of a game state disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be played in anticipation of the provision of the second privilege, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the second determination means can determine a special second determination result different from the specific second determination result, and based on the determination as the special second determination result The gaming machine C3 is characterized in that a special privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege is granted to the player.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1 or C2, a special privilege that is more advantageous than the first privilege is granted to the player by the second determination, so that the provision of the first privilege is restricted. Even so, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem of lowering the player's desire to play.

A gaming machine C4 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the first condition can be established even when the special privilege is granted.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, even when a special privilege is granted, the granting of the first privilege is regulated, which is disadvantageous to the player. There is an effect that, while restricting the setting of the game state, a special privilege can be given to the player to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the game machines C1 to C3, when the special privilege is provided, the dynamic display of the first identification information dynamically displayed is interrupted until the release condition is satisfied. A gaming machine C5 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, when a special privilege is provided, the dynamic display of the first identification information is interrupted, so the special privilege is provided. There is an effect that it is possible to make the user interested in the result of the first determination even after the determination.

<Feature D group> (Aim for an advantageous jackpot during jackpot fluctuations (replay off on ST machine))
a first determination means capable of executing a first determination; and a first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying, on a display means, first identification information for indicating a first determination result by the first determination means. , first dynamic display period determination means capable of determining a first dynamic display period of the first identification information displayed by the first dynamic display means; and displaying the specific first determination result on the display means a first privilege granting means capable of granting a first privilege advantageous to the player when the first identification information is displayed in a display mode for indicating the a second dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information for indicating the second determination result by the second determination means on the display means; a second dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a second dynamic display period of the second identification information; A second privilege granting means capable of imparting a second privilege that is advantageous to the player when displayed, a first game state, and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. and a game state setting means capable of setting the game state setting means, when the second game state is set, the first privilege is given based on , setting the first game state, and switching from the second game state to the first game state based on the number of times of determination by the first determination means or the second determination means becoming the number of times of completion. A game machine D1 characterized by being a thing.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning opening is a win. Some of such gaming machines are set to either a normal game state or an advantageous game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state, triggered by the end of the winning state. In this conventional type gaming machine, by differentiating the type of the starting prize-winning port that the player mainly wins in the normal game state and the advantageous game state, the interest of the game is varied according to the change in the game state, thereby diversifying the game. (For example, Patent Document 1: JP-A-2006-000392). To solve the problem that a lottery game executed when a game ball enters a starting winning hole is only displayed in a variable pattern according to a predetermined variation pattern, the game becomes monotonous, and the player gets tired of the game early. there was a point

According to the gaming machine D1, there are cases where the number of determinations reaches the number of times of termination and the state is switched to the first game state, and where the first privilege is granted and the first game state is set. It is possible to play a variety of games, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem of early boredom with games.

In the gaming machine D1, the game state setting means, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, performs the second game based on execution of the dynamic display of the first identification information based on the specific first determination result. The game machine D2 is characterized in that it is possible to set the first game state after the state is set and the dynamic display of the first identification information is completed.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1, the period of the second game state is determined by the dynamic display period of the first identification information based on the specific first determination result. There is an effect that the player can be interested in the dynamic display period and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the game machine D1 or D2, the dynamically displayed first identification information is displayed based on the establishment of the first condition during the period when the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. A gaming machine D3, characterized by having a first control means capable of executing a first control for forcing the first determination result corresponding to the information to be other than the specific first determination result.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1 or D2, the fulfillment of the first condition can force a determination result other than the specific first determination result. It is possible to prevent the game from transitioning to a game state, and there is an effect that the satisfaction of the first condition can be heightened and the interest can be improved.

In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the first condition is that the second privilege is granted when the first identification information corresponding to the specific first determination result is dynamically displayed. A game machine D4 characterized in that it is constructed so that it can be established under the condition that

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the provision of the second privilege is a requirement for fulfillment of the first condition, so the value of the second privilege can be increased. It has the effect of being able to

<Feature group E> (remaining period effect of advantageous period C group effect)
a first determination means capable of executing a first determination; and a first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying, on a display means, first identification information for indicating a first determination result by the first determination means. , first dynamic display period determination means capable of determining a first dynamic display period of the first identification information displayed by the first dynamic display means; and displaying the specific first determination result on the display means a first privilege granting means capable of granting a first privilege advantageous to the player when the first identification information is displayed in a display mode for indicating the a second dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information for indicating the second determination result by the second determination means on the display means; a second dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a second dynamic display period of the second identification information; a second privilege granting means capable of imparting a second privilege advantageous to the player when displayed, wherein the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. During the period, the first determination result corresponding to the dynamically displayed first identification information is forcibly changed to other than the specific first determination result based on the establishment of the first condition. a first control means capable of executing No. 1 control, and a suggestion for suggesting the remaining period of the first dynamic display period when the first identification information that results in the specific first determination result is dynamically displayed. A game machine E1 characterized by having a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing the effect.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning opening is a win. Some of such gaming machines are set to either a normal game state or an advantageous game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state, triggered by the end of the winning state. In this conventional type gaming machine, by differentiating the type of the starting prize-winning port that the player mainly wins in the normal game state and the advantageous game state, the interest of the game is varied according to the change in the game state, thereby diversifying the game. (For example, Patent Document 1: JP-A-2006-000392). To solve the problem that a lottery game executed when a game ball enters a starting winning hole is only displayed in a variable pattern according to a predetermined variation pattern, the game becomes monotonous, and the player gets tired of the game early. there was a point

According to the gaming machine E1, when a specific first determination result is dynamically displayed, a suggesting mode suggesting the remaining dynamic display period is displayed, whereby the first condition is satisfied and the first A player can recognize a period during which the granting of one privilege is restricted, the timing of granting the first privilege can also be made interesting to the player, and the problem that the player gets bored with the game early can be suppressed. It has the effect of being able to

The gaming machine E1 has game state setting means capable of setting a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and the game state setting means is capable of setting the first game state. When the first game state is set, the second game state is set based on the dynamic display of the first identification information corresponding to the specific first determination result. Characterized game machine E2.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1, when the first gaming state is set, the first identification information corresponding to the specific first determination result is dynamically displayed. There is an effect that the value can be increased.

In the gaming machine E1 or E2, the first condition is that the second privilege is granted when the first identification information corresponding to the specific first determination result is dynamically displayed. The gaming machine E3 is characterized in that it is configured to be established.

According to the gaming machine E3, the first condition can be established on the condition that the second privilege is granted in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1 or E2. There is an effect that it can be increased.

<Feature F group> (notifies the period when small winning is advantageous)
a first determination means capable of executing a first determination; and a first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying, on a display means, first identification information for indicating a first determination result by the first determination means. , first dynamic display period determination means capable of determining a first dynamic display period of the first identification information displayed by the first dynamic display means; and displaying the specific first determination result on the display means a first privilege granting means capable of granting a first privilege advantageous to the player when the first identification information is displayed in a display mode for indicating the a second dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information for indicating the second determination result by the second determination means on the display means; a second dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a second dynamic display period of the second identification information; and a second privilege granting means capable of granting a second privilege advantageous to a player when displayed, wherein the second privilege is imparted based on the second privilege imparting timing. A gaming machine F1 characterized by having a privilege variable means for varying a privilege to be played.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning opening is a win. Some of such gaming machines are set to either a normal game state or an advantageous game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state, triggered by the end of the winning state. In this conventional type gaming machine, by differentiating the type of the starting prize-winning port that the player mainly wins in the normal game state and the advantageous game state, the interest of the game is varied according to the change in the game state, thereby diversifying the game. (For example, Patent Document 1: JP-A-2006-000392). To solve the problem that a lottery game executed when a game ball enters a starting winning hole is only displayed in a variable pattern according to a predetermined variation pattern, the game becomes monotonous, and the player gets tired of the game early. there was a point

According to the gaming machine F1, since the privilege granted by the second privilege is variable depending on the timing of granting the second privilege, it is possible to make the player interested in the timing of granting the second privilege. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets tired of the game early.

In the gaming machine F1, during the period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means, the second privilege is given and dynamically displayed. A game machine characterized by comprising first control means capable of executing first control for forcibly making the first determination result corresponding to the first identification information other than the specific first determination result. F2.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1, the execution of the first control makes it possible to avoid giving the first privilege and to increase the value of the second privilege. be.

In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the first privilege granting means grants one privilege type from among a plurality of different privilege types as the first privilege, and is granted when the first control is executed. The game machine F3 is characterized by being capable of notifying suggestive information based on the type of privilege in the first privilege that can be obtained.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1 or F2, the player can recognize the type of the first privilege that has not been given by the suggestive information, and the effect that the interest of the game can be improved. be.

<Feature G group> (announcement of discarded content)
a first determination means capable of executing a first determination; and a first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying, on a display means, first identification information for indicating a first determination result by the first determination means. , a first dynamic display period determination means capable of determining a first dynamic display period of the first identification information displayed by the first dynamic display means; and a second determination means capable of executing a second determination. a second dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information for indicating the second determination result by the second determination means on the display means; a second dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a second dynamic display period of the second identification information, wherein the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result is When displayed, the first privilege granting means capable of granting a first privilege corresponding to one of a plurality of different privilege types to be granted to the player; and the first dynamic display means. During the period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed, the first determination result corresponding to the dynamically displayed first identification information is forcibly changed to the specific one based on the establishment of a first condition. A first control means capable of executing a first control other than the first determination result, and when the first control is executed, the first privilege granting means grants the specific first determination result and reporting means for reporting suggestive information capable of suggesting information corresponding to the type of the first privilege that has been played.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning opening is a win. Some of such gaming machines are set to either a normal game state or an advantageous game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state, triggered by the end of the winning state. In this conventional type gaming machine, by differentiating the type of the starting prize-winning port that the player mainly wins in the normal game state and the advantageous game state, the interest of the game is varied according to the change in the game state, thereby diversifying the game. (For example, Patent Document 1: JP-A-2006-000392). To solve the problem that a lottery game executed when a game ball enters a starting winning hole is only displayed in a variable pattern according to a predetermined variation pattern, the game becomes monotonous, and the player gets tired of the game early. there was a point

According to the gaming machine G1, the player can recognize the type of the first privilege that has not been given due to the execution of the first control from the suggestive information, and the interest in the game is improved, so that the player can start playing early. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem of getting bored with the game.

In the gaming machine G1, the first condition is satisfied under the condition that the second privilege is granted when the first identification information corresponding to the specific first determination result is dynamically displayed. A gaming machine G2 characterized by being configured to be able to

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1, the first condition can be established by providing the second privilege, so there is an effect that the value of the second privilege can be increased.

The gaming machine G1 or G2 has an effect executing means capable of executing an effect based on the provision of the second privilege, and the effect executing means varies the effect based on the suggestive information. A gaming machine G3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G1 or G2, the effect executed based on the granting of the second privilege is varied according to the suggestion information. It becomes possible to compare with the 2nd privilege given, and there exists an effect that interest can be improved.

The gaming machine Z1 is characterized in that each gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls enter a prize winning opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through a prize winning opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win prizes, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes won Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

The gaming machine Z2 is characterized in that each gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

The gaming machine Z3 is characterized in that each gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.
<Others>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a win state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning hole is a win. Some of such gaming machines are set to either a normal game state or an advantageous game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state, triggered by the end of the winning state. In this conventional type gaming machine, by differentiating the type of the starting prize-winning port that the player mainly wins in the normal game state and the advantageous game state, the interest of the game is varied according to the change in the game state, thereby diversifying the game. (For example, Patent Document 1: JP-A-2006-000392).
However, the lottery game that is executed when a game ball enters the starting winning hole is only displayed in a variable pattern according to a predetermined variation pattern, and the game becomes monotonous and the player quickly becomes bored with the game. There was a problem.
The present technical idea was made to solve the above-described problems, and aims to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of the game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of technical idea 1 comprises first determination means capable of executing a first determination, and display means for displaying first identification information for indicating a first determination result by the first determination means. and a first dynamic display period capable of determining the first dynamic display period of the first identification information displayed by the first dynamic display means. a determining means, and a first privilege capable of imparting a first privilege advantageous to a player when the first identification information is displayed on the display means in a specific display mode for indicating the first determination result. addition means, second determination means capable of executing a second determination, and second determination means capable of dynamically displaying second identification information for indicating a second determination result on a display means by the second determination means. second dynamic display period determination means capable of determining a second dynamic display period of the second identification information displayed by the second dynamic display means; 2 a second privilege giving means capable of giving a second privilege that is advantageous to the player when the second identification information is displayed in a display mode for indicating a determination result; while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the display means, the first determination result corresponding to the dynamically displayed first identification information is forcibly displayed based on an established condition. It has a switching means capable of switching between a first control for setting a result other than the specific first determination result and a second control for interrupting the dynamic display of the dynamically displayed first identification information. be.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, wherein the switching means displays the second privilege while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. The first control can be executed under the condition that the first type privilege is granted in the condition as the first condition, and the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means The second control can be executed under the second condition that the second type privilege in the second privilege is granted during the period.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1 or 2, wherein the switching means is determined as the specific first determination result as at least one of the conditions for establishing the first condition. The condition is that the dynamic display of the first identification information based on
The gaming machine of technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of technical ideas 1 to 3, wherein the first privilege is composed of a privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the second privilege. is.
A gaming machine according to technical idea 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of technical ideas 1 to 4, wherein a first gaming state and a second gaming state more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state are provided. A settable game state setting means is provided, and the game state setting means sets the first game state based on the first privilege being given in the state where the second game state is set. It can be set.
<effect>
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 1, the first determination means capable of executing the first determination and the first identification information for indicating the first determination result by the first determination means are dynamically displayed on the display means. and a first dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a first dynamic display period of the first identification information displayed by the first dynamic display means; a first privilege imparting means capable of imparting a first privilege advantageous to a player when the first identification information is displayed on the display means in a display mode for indicating the specific first determination result; second determination means capable of executing the second determination; and second dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information for indicating the second determination result on the display means by the second determination means. , a second dynamic display period determination means capable of determining a second dynamic display period of the second identification information displayed by the second dynamic display means; a second privilege granting means capable of granting a second privilege that is advantageous to the player when the second identification information is displayed in a display mode for showing During the period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed, the first determination result corresponding to the dynamically displayed first identification information is forcibly changed to the specific first identification information based on an established condition. It has a switching means capable of switching between a first control for setting a determination result other than 1 and a second control for interrupting the dynamic display of the dynamically displayed first identification information.
Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets bored with the game early.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the switching means determines that the first type privilege in the second privilege is given during the period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. As, the first control can be executed, and the second type privilege in the second privilege is given during the period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means as a second condition in the above conditions, the second control can be executed.
Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make the player easily recognize the privilege given to the player.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 1 or 2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the switching means determines that dynamic display of the first identification information based on determination as the specific first determination result is being performed as at least one of the conditions for establishing the first condition. It is a condition.
Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.
According to the game machine described in technical idea 4, in addition to the effects of the game machine described in any one of technical ideas 1 to 3, the following effects are obtained. That is, the first privilege is composed of privileges that are more advantageous to the player than the second privilege.
Therefore, there is an effect that the award of the first privilege can be suppressed and the privilege to be granted can be restricted.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in any one of technical ideas 1 to 4, the following effects are achieved. That is, it has a game state setting means capable of setting a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and the game state setting means is capable of setting the second game state. is set, the first game state can be set based on the award of the first privilege.
Therefore, there is an effect that the second privilege can be easily granted.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
S405 first determination means
S508 first effect executing means
Part of S653 second determination means
Part of S1101 second discrimination means
Part of S1301 second discrimination means
Part of S1304 second discrimination means
S1306 second effect executing means

Claims (1)

a first determination means capable of performing a first determination;
Based on the fact that the first discrimination result by the first discriminating means is a specific first discrimination result, a first effect can be executed that ends when a predetermined period elapses. a performance execution means;
a second determination means capable of performing a second determination;
a second effect execution means capable of executing a second effect based on the fact that the second determination result by the second determination means is a specific second determination result,
The game machine is
A first state in which the second determination can be performed by the second determination means is set during the period in which the first effect is performed,
A second state is set in which the second determination by the second determination means is not executed when the first effect is terminated after the predetermined period has elapsed since the first effect was started. A gaming machine characterized by comprising: